Home
        Salesforce.com Winter `13 Release Notes
         Contents
1.         salesforce  p     Salesforce com  Winter    13    Salesforce com Winter  13 Release Notes       Last updated  January 4 2013          Copyright 2000 2012 salesforce com  inc  All rights reserved  Salesforce com is a registered trademark of salesforce com  inc   as are other  names and marks  Other marks appearing herein may be trademarks of their respective owners     Table of Contents  Table of Contents   About the Release Notes o5550ccsiceispeacantuanccoucaccsiaucndua cecdudaeas adic tatees ete dete ede ed et dee 4  What s  Included  in the Release  Notes se  cicsccssessecaacsieecsettaccnedicssviiessetcens a a a E EE E E E iaaa E 4   Your Feedback Matters cette cccsiessctecitette cs coulecretestsuet vsetnestts leaks Hesisetuchdzssiietdctesedoataeltaassueeseliwa ci suehsiesandaahsecedesstveleeaeescettcetoag EAA 4  Release Notes  hanes viecscssssssisusiesevsnsinnsesansnasnsyasniesinslnneselsansitsiconsesitsiebssnanacbaasenscssedstdiebansieceleswesisnbsasnedensaens 5  Summary of Winter 13 Features and Impact on Salesforce Users           ssccccssssssssscsssssssssssesssssssssssssessesees 8  General Enhancements oeira Ea E E EEA A EEE ETE AAA ER Ee S Bheeceeds  AEN E ATE EEE 8  Chatter Enhancement Sesser rere enn E S EES EE EE T E E ENEE 8   Sales Enhancementseirsmeniini aiei a e AAS T E AEE EE TO he ice 10  Semice Enhancements sespe aroa cos ER E SR S E ia ss fa N oven ENTE ores tan De tund seus ves Gee EEEE EN EEEE 11  Analytics  Enhancements ssssssseneieserevsivenssni
2.        sendEmailMessage List  lt ID gt  Messaging SendEmailResult   Sends up to 10 draft email messages as defined by the  emai IMessagelds specified email message IDs and returns a list of  B SendEmailResult objects   oolean  allOrNothing The sendEmailMessage method assumes that the    optional opt_allOrNone parameter is always false and  ignores the value you set  This optional parameter specifies  whether sendEmailMessage prevents delivery of all  other messages when any of the messages fail due to an       188    Developer Console Enhancements Apex Code Enhancements    error  true   or whether it allows delivery of the messages  that don t have errors  false      Example     This example shows how to send a draft email message     It creates a case and a new email message associated with  the case  Next  the example sends a draft email message  and checks the results  Before running this example  make  sure to replace the email address with a valid address     Case c   new Case     MSE CF    EmailMessage e   new EmailMessage     e parentid   c id       Set to draft status       This status is required      for sendEmailMessage      Go Sicccus    5  9   e TextBody      Sampl mail message       Subject    Apex sample    e ToAddress    customer email com    insert e                 List lt Messaging SendEmailResult gt   results    Messaging sendEmailMessage  new ID     eici Pz    System assertEquals  1  results size      System assertEquals  true   results 0  success        
3.      73    Ideas       Idea Themes    Enabling Idea Themes    Available in  Professional  Enterprise  Unlimited  and Developer Editions       To customize Idea Themes settings     Customize Application       1   2   3   4     a  Note  Once you enable Idea Themes  you can   t disable it     Click Your Name  gt  Setup  gt  Customize  gt  Ideas  gt  Idea Themes  gt  Settings   Click Edit   Select Enable Idea Themes     Click Save           _    Creating and Editing Idea Themes    Available in  Professional  Enterprise  Unlimited  and Developer Editions    To view the Idea Themes tab     Read    on Idea Themes    To create Idea Themes     Create    on Ideas       You can use the Idea Themes tab in both the application and the console to create and edit Idea Themes for the communities  that you manage     1     w    Click New Idea Theme from the Idea Themes list view page or click New from the Recent Idea Themes list on the Idea  Themes overview page     Select a community for the idea theme and click Continue    Select the idea theme   s Status    Select a category for the theme    Idea themes must be assigned to a category to appear in the community   Add a title for the idea theme    Optionally  enter a description of the theme    Use the HTML editor to format your text or add an image or video     Click Save     74    Ideas Idea Themes    Using Idea Themes    Available in  Professional  Enterprise  Unlimited  and Developer Editions    To view the Idea Themes tab     Read    on
4.      Note  iPad users who have an old version of the Chatter for iPad app     Chatter for iPad v2 0 or earlier     must    download the app from the App Store  Those users won t see a pending update on their device     100    DATA COM    Data com Product Suite Overview    O a Demo  3 19 minutes     Data com is salesforce com s solution for delivering leading business data inside your CRM  Your team can spend less time  entering and updating data and more time growing your business  Data com combines crowd sourced contacts with account  information from D amp B  managed in the cloud  so you can keep your CRM clean and up to date in real time  Within Salesforce   you can search for Data com accounts and contacts right on the Data com tab  and if you have a Data com license  you can  add records to Salesforce  You can add your contact search results as either contacts or leads  It s remarkably easy to find the  accounts and contacts you need  and using Data com is a great way to plan your sales territories  segment campaigns  find new  accounts to engage  and get new contacts to quickly expand your sales network  The Data com product suite includes Data com  Corporate and Data com Premium  as well as related products Data com Clean and Data com Reports  This topic describes  them all  and explains how they work together     Home Chatter Profile fi  F27 D amp B Companies Files Accounts Contacts Leads Reports Dashboards      nr Watch a Video Tutorial Help for this Page    d Data c
5.      Organization Name The name of the organization  Clicking this name shows  the upgrade history for the organization     Primary Contact The name of the contact who installed the package        7  Click Schedule     While a push upgrade is in progress  you can click Abort to stop it     Viewing Push Upgrade Details    For information about a specific push upgrade that your organization sent  click Your Name  gt  Setup  gt  Create  gt  Packages   click the name of the package you want to view  then click Push Upgrades  Clicking on the name of a Target takes you to  the Push Upgrade Details page  which has information both for the push job and each organization that it was pushed to     The Job Details section has the following information about the overall push upgrade  in alphabetical order      207    Developer Console Enhancements Push Major Upgrade    End Date The date and time the push upgrade finished     Ignore Apex Test Failures Whether Apex test failures that may cause the installed  application not to function properly were ignored     Scheduled By The name of the user who initiated the push upgrade     Start Date The scheduled start date and time of the push upgrade     Status The status of the push upgrade  whether scheduled  in  progress  completed  aborted  or completed with failures     Version The package version number that was pushed        In the Organizations section  you can get a list of all the organizations that received a push upgrade  You can filte
6.      Update operations on child events are very limited     These changes allow you to create and modify event attendees  invitees  through the API  Previously  this was possible through  the UI only  The new API also supports Shared Activities for events so users can relate non recurring events to as many as 10  contacts  Even if you don   t enable Shared Activities for events for your users  the following event object changes will affect  you        Event Object    The Event object has two new fields  WhatCount and WhoCount     58    Shared Activities Enhancements Event and EventAttendee Object Changes    EventAttendee Object The EventRelation object replaces the EventAttendee object      The EventRelation object represents a person  user  contact  or lead  or resource  such  as a conference room  invited to an event   The EventRelation object allows you to add or remove invitees from an event  and to  manage invitee responses to invitations through theAPI   When Shared Activities is enabled  an EventRelation object can also represent a Who  or What object   The EventAttendee object is no longer visible to users with API version 26 0 and greater   Existing Apex and API packages that use API version 25 0 and older can still query the  EventAttendee object     Invitee Information The RelationId field contains the ID of the person or resource invited to the event  The  value of this field can   t be changed after it has been specified  When Shared Activities for  events is ena
7.     lastName    gt   Appleseed    age    gt   42             public PageReference submitFieldData      doSomethingInterestingWithInput      return null          public void doSomethingInterestingWithInput      inputFields put  age    Integer valueOf  inputFields get  age      10  format           Improved Handling of Formula Fields in  lt apex  outputField gt     The  lt apex  outputField gt  component provides a read only display of sObject fields  The component adapts its output to  match the type of the field displayed  and the behavior is intended to match the standard Salesforce interface  Prior to Winter   13 this wasn   t always the case  formula fields that used the HYPERLINK    function to create custom URLs weren   t handled  correctly by  lt apex  outputField gt   The field value was escaped when it shouldn t have been  and instead of displaying an  active link it displayed the HTML for the hyperlink  This is now fixed        This change is versioned  and you must update your Visualforce pages to API version 26 0 to enable the new behavior     The most common work around for the issue was to use  lt apex  outputText gt  with the escape attribute set to false         lt apex outputText value    someSObject customURL   escape  false   gt     201    Developer Console Enhancements Additional Visualforce Enhancements    This can now be rewritten to use the more general  lt apex  outputField gt          lt apex outputField value    someSObject customURL    gt        Warn
8.    Map Data com fields to Salesforce Account  Contact  and Lead fields  Before you begin  make sure you understand how  field mapping works   Respect Do Not Contact settings when you add or export Data com contacts or leads     Allow duplicate account  contact  and lead records in Salesforce     You ll also want to learn about these enhancements     Enhanced record addition error logs     103    Data com Data com Administrator Features and Enhancements    Field Mapping Help for this Page      Field Mapping Save    Undo Field Mapping Help       Map Data com fields to Salesforce account  contact  and lead fields  You can also skip mapping individual Data com fields  but values for skipped fields won t be  added  exported  or considered when we calculate a record s clean status        Accounts    Data com field a Q Account field  Company Name  gt  Account Name  D U N S Number  gt   Default  D U N S Number  D amp B Company  gt   Default  D amp B Company    Number of    Default  Employees  Employees    Annual Revenue  gt   Default  Annual Revenue  Ticker Symbol  gt   Default  Ticker Symbol  Website  gt   Default  Website  Industry  gt   Default  Industry  Ownership  gt   Default  Ownership  Address  gt   Default  Billing Address  Shipping Address  gt  Skip Mapping  Phone  gt   Default  Phone  Fax  gt   Default  Fax  Account Site  gt   Default  Account Site  Tradestyle  gt   Default  Tradestyle  Year Stated  gt   Default  Year Started  SiC Code  gt   Default  SIC Code  SIC Descript
9.    To view the Questions tab     Read    on questions    To ask and reply to questions   Create    on questions       am Note  Since your administrator determines the fields on questions  some fields might not be included in the following  steps       et    You can use the Questions tab in both the application and the console to ask questions of the communities that you moderate  and manage  Asking community members for input or opinions is an easy way to assess interest in topics or create engagement  in the community     To post a question to the community from the Questions tab     1  Click New Question from the Questions list view page or click New from the Recent Questions list on the Questions  overview page     2  Select a community for your question     See    Add a title for your question   4  Optionally  enter a description of your question     Use the rich text editor to format your text or upload an image  To ensure that your images appear correctly in the feed   Salesforce recommends that they be less than 450 pixels wide     5  Select a category for your question     Questions must be assigned to a category to appear in the community  Questions that don   t have a category are still visible  to the owner of the question  but not to other members of the community     6  Click Save     Enhancements to Questions and Answers in the Feed    Available in  Enterprise and Unlimited Editions    In Winter    13  we ve made using Chatter Answers even easier by enhancing th
10.   Click the Chat header to expand the chat window   2  Click        3  Click someone   s name to see your chat history with them     Additionally  your chats and chat history are maintained if you switch between multiple browser tabs     Chatter Reporting    Available in  Group  Professional  Enterprise  Unlimited  Contact Manager  and Developer Editions       You can now create two new custom report types   one that shows Chatter activity statistics and influence rank and one that  shows how your organization is using public hashtag     topics  Public hashtag topics are those used on profiles and in public  groups  For privacy reasons  hashtag topic usage reports don   t include hashtags used on records or in private groups     When defining a custom report type with Chatter activity statistics and influence rank data  choose the Chatter Activity  primary object and select from the following fields     Comment Count   Number of comments made by the parent  Comment Received Count   Number of comments received by the parent     Influence Raw Rank   Number indicating the parent   s influence rank  which is calculated based on the parent   s Chatter  activity statistics  relative to the other users in the organization     Like Received Count   Number of likes received by the parent    e Parent   User name    32    Additional Chatter Enhancements Improved Feed Sorting Includes Polls      Post Count   Number of posts made by the parent    When defining a custom report type with ha
11.   Indicator Indicator    Stock Exchange NYSE Ticker Symbol CRM  FIPSMSACode 41860 FIPS MSA Code  Description  Primary Tradestyle D U N S Number 072148831    Primary SIC Code 7372 Primary SIC Prepackaged Software  Description  Primary NAICS Code 511210 Primary NAICS Software Publishers  Description    Longitude  122 394746 Latitude  37 794340       120    D amp B Companies D amp B Companies User Features and Enhancements    Adding Data com Contacts as Leads    Data com available in  Contact Manager  Developer  Enterprise  Group  and Professional Editions    Data com available for an additional cost in  Unlimited Edition    Data com Clean available in  Developer  Enterprise  and Professional Editions    Data com Clean available for an additional cost in  Unlimited Edition    To add Data com contacts as leads     Create    on leads       Need leads  Get them from Data com  First search for contacts  then add the contacts you want to Salesforce as leads  Records  you ve already added from Data com     won t be added again unless the record has been deleted from Salesforce or your  organization allows duplicates     If you use Data com Premium  when you add a lead from Data com  a corresponding D amp B Company record  if one exists in  Data com  is automatically created in Salesforce and linked to the lead record via its D amp B Company field     1  Search for contacts   2  Select the contacts you want to add and click Add to Salesforce   3  Select Leads to add the records as lead
12.   New Access Token Method    The Auth  AuthToken Apex class has a new method to retrieve access tokens  getAccessTokenMap  Use this method if  the user ID is mapped to multiple third party users  getAccessTokenMap returns a map of access tokens for each third party  user  For more information  see    About External Authentication Providers    in the Salesforce online help     getAccessTokenMap String Map lt String  String gt  Returns a map from the third party identifier to the access  authProviderId token for the currently logged in Salesforce user  The    identifier value depends on the third party  For example   for Salesforce it would be the user ID  while for Facebook  it would be the user number     String    providerName       189    Developer Console Enhancements Apex Code Enhancements    Support EmailTemplateSelector Interface       The Support  EmailTemplateSelector interface enables providing default email templates in Case Feed  With default  email templates  specified email templates are preloaded for cases based on criteria such as case origin or subject     To specify default templates  you must create a class that implements Support  EmailTemplateSelector  The  Support EmailTemplateSelector interface contains the following method                 getDefaultTemplatelId ID caseld Returns the ID of the email template to preload for    the case currently being viewed in the case feed using  the specified case ID        Example Implementation       This is an exampl
13.   Salesforce Communities  Pilot        Browser Enhancements       Chatter Enhancements                   Polls   Chatter Tab Navigation Enhancements   Chatter Influence Calculation   Enhancement   Improved Posting Experience   Chatter Desktop Enhancements    Summary of Winter 13 Features and Impact on Salesforce Users    Preview Links    Work com in Chatter   Pilot       Administrator Settings for Rich Media  Previews    Salesforce Communities  Pilot        Chatter Messenger Enhancements   available within 24 hours after the  Winter  13 release        Chatter Reporting   Improved Feed Sorting Includes Polls  Post Visibility   Updated Chatter Icons and Buttons    Chatter Feed Search Label Change       View the External Apps Approved to  Access Chatter Data       Unfollow Unused Record Subscriptions     Create and Own New Chatter Groups       User Permission    Google Talk in Salesforce No Longer  Supported By Google    Chatter REST API Enhancements       Chatter API   Connect in Apex  Pilot        Summary of Winter 13 Features and Impact on Salesforce Users    Sales Enhancements       Use Chatter People Hovers  Rep  Hovers        Create Forecasting Custom Report  Types       Forecast Managers Can Adjust Forecasts  in Any Currency          Configurable Forecast List View for the  Opportunity Pane       Customizing Opportunity Teams       K    Opportunity Team Known Limitations                Enabling Team Selling   Disabling Team Selling   Editing Multi Line Layouts for  Opport
14.   The Developer Console retrieves and displays code coverage information from your organization  Code coverage results come  from any tests you ve run from an API or from a user interface  for example  the Developer Console  the Force com IDE  or  the Apex Test Execution page   When you edit a class  the code coverage for that class clears until you run the tests again     You can view code coverage in several places in the Developer Console     1  Click the Tests tab  The Overall Code Coverage panel displays the code coverage percentage for every Apex class in your  organization that has been included in a test run  It also displays the overall percentage    2  Double click a completed test run to open a Tests view   The Tests view displays the tested class  the tested method  the duration  result  skip  pass  or fail   and an optional error  message  If the test failed  a Stack Trace column shows the method and line number at which the test failed    3  Select a Class in a Tests view to see the code coverage for each method invoked by the class in the Class Code Coverage  pane    4  To view line by line code coverage for an Apex class  double click the class in a Tests view or in the Repository tab to  open it in a Source Code view     5  From the Code Coverage menu  select one of the following     Option Description   None No tests have been run    All Tests The percentage of code coverage from all test runs   className methodName The percentage of code coverage from a met
15.   any semicolons in the selected choices    stored values are removed when added to the multi select field value     Similar to single selection choice fields  such as radio buttons and drop down lists  you can populate multi select choice  fields with flow specific choices and dynamic choices only  You can   t populate multi select picklists in flows with the   picklist values of standard or multi select picklist fields elsewhere in your organization      A multi select choice field can have only one default value      A dynamic choice resource can be configured to assign field values from one user selected record to variables in the flow   When the dynamic choice is used in a multi select choice field  flow variables store the field values of only the last selected  record in the dynamically generated set of choices  If the dynamic choice is used in multiple multi select choice fields on  the same screen  the flow variable assignments are determined by the first multi select choice field on the screen     To ensure the correct runtime behavior of Decision elements that reference multi select choice fields     Configure a stored value for each choice that you use in multi select choice fields        Don   t use the same choice in multiple multi select choice fields on the same screen     Visualforce Controller Access to Subflow Variables    Available in  Enterprise  Unlimited  and Developer Editions    Previously  a Visualforce controller could access variable values in only
16.   cause a run time exception because of duplicate field  values     To learn more about default field values  see    About Default  Field Values    in the Salesforce online help     For an example  see Sample  Create New sObject with Default  Values        Sample  Create New sObject with Default Values    This sample creates an account with any default values populated for its custom fields  if any  using the newSObject method   It also creates a second account for a specific record type  For both accounts  the sample sets the Name field  which is a required  field that doesn   t have a default value  before inserting the new accounts        Create an account with predefined default values  Account acct    Account  Account sObjectType newSObject  null  true      186    Developer Console Enhancements Apex Code Enhancements       Provide a value for Name  acct Name    Acme        Insert new account   Fas Graitemecl    Cite       This is for record type RT1 of Account       ID rtId    SELECT Id FROM RecordType WHERE sObjectType  Account  AND Name  RT1    Id   Account acct2    Account  Account sObjectType newSObject rtId  true        Provide a value for Name   acct2 Name    Acme2         Insert new account  ineert TECE    Starting a Batch Job from Another Batch Job    You can now start a batch job from another batch job by calling Database  executeBatch from the finish method of  the batch class  This allows you to link your batch jobs and create a chain of jobs  Note that the go
17.   directly on iPad devices is now available from the Apple App Store  and AppExchange Mobile  The Touch Settings page has been  updated to include a new enablement option for the Salesforce  Touch downloadable app     November 7  2012 Force com IDE Enhancements Added section about Force com IDE update     Release Notes Changes       October 31  2012 Clarified Support for IE Conditional Clarified details of IE conditional comments  noting that only a    Comments limited subset of Visualforce is supported within conditional  comments   October 31  2012 Push Major Upgrade Added a note saying this feature is available only to eligible  salesforce com partners   October 24  2012 Link to Known Issues Site Added link to the Salesforce Known Issues site   October 24  2012 Chatter for iPhone and iPad     Added a section announcing the release of Chatter for iOS v2 4     Version 2 4 Generally Available  October 17  2012 Chatter Desktop Enhancements Updated release date and removed more frequent feed updates     October 17  2012 Aggregate Function Enhancements Added information about updates to SOQL aggregate functions     October 10  2012 Unfollow Unused Record Added clarifications about the script for unfollowing unused record  Subscriptions subscriptions    October 10  2012    Create and Own New Chatter Added a section on the    Create and Own New Chatter Groups     Groups    User Permission user permission    October 3  2012 Workflow Evaluation Criteria Updated for further changes m
18.   only functioned with Visualforce  Now  the toolkit is available for use with third party domains  such as www  yourdomain com   so that developers can embed third party applications in the console  To enable the toolkit for third party domains  you must  add the domains to the whitelist of a Service Cloud console     For more information  English only  about the toolkit  see the Service Cloud Console Integration Toolkit Developer s Guide  To    learn how to enable the toolkit for third party domains  see    Whitelisting Domains for a Service Cloud Console    in the online  help     Service Cloud Console Integration Toolkit  Console  Notifications    Available in  Enterprise  Unlimited  and Developer Editions with the Service Cloud    The Service Cloud Console Integration Toolkit is an API that uses browsers to display pages as tabs in the console  It provides  advanced administrators and developers with programmatic access to the console so that they can extend it to meet your  business needs  For example  developers can use the toolkit to open and close tabs in the console to streamline a business  process     With Winter    13  the following new methods are available     85    Additional Service Enhancements    addPushNotificationListener       getPagelInfo      getPrimaryTablIds         getSubtablIds       removePushNotificationListener       Editing Replies to Questions    Adds a listener for a push notification  A user can only register  a listener once until he or she
19.   you can exclude any records that have already been exported or  are already in Salesforce  Just select that option from the export confirmation message     Selected Records are Preserved Across Search Results Pages    When you select Data com records from your account or contact search results  your selections are now preserved across  multiple pages of results  That means you can select records on one page of your search results and move to another page to  select more records without losing the selections on the first page  You can select up to 1 000 records     New Industry Mapping    Data com now uses the primary SIC  NAICS  and Data com Industry Category codes to determine the Industry field value  on account records  This simplified approach allows for more accurate and relevant search results no matter which industry  classification system you use in your search query     108    Data com Data com User Enhancements       For example  if you use the SIC system for your search criteria and select the Computer Peripheral Equipment  industry  which maps to Electronics  your results will include all accounts with a value of Electronics in the Industry  field  If you use the Data com Industry Categories classification system for your search criteria and select the Computers  and Electronic industry  which also maps to Electronics  your results will again include all accounts with a value of             Electronics inthe Industry field     This new mapping system also means 
20.  0  maximum  100  steps  10   gt    lt apex gaugeSeries dataField  datal  highlight  true  tips  true  donut  50  gt    lt apex chartLabel display  over   gt    lt  apex gaugeSeries gt    lt  apex chart gt           See the Visualforce Developer s Guide for full details of the new chart type     192    Developer Console Enhancements Visualforce Charting   Generally Available    Radar Charts with  lt apex  radarSeries gt     Use radar charts to plot a series of connected points along a radial axis  Radar charts are sometimes called    spider web    charts        You can add multiple  lt apex  radarSeries gt  components to a single chart  To use an  lt apex  radarSeries gt  chart  add  an  lt apex axis type  Radial  gt  component  Here   s a simple example      lt apex chart height  530  width  700  legend  true  data    data   gt    lt apex legend position  left   gt    lt apex axis type  Radial  position  radial  gt    lt apex chartLabel  gt    lt  apex axis gt    lt apex radarSeries xField  name  yField  datal  tips  true  opacity  0 4   gt    lt apex radarSeries xField  name  yField  data2  tips  true  opacity  0 4   gt    lt apex radarSeries xField  name  yField  data3  tips  true   markerType  cross  strokeWidth  2  strokeColor   f  33  opacity  0 4   gt    lt  apex chart gt        See the Visualforce Developer s Guide for complete details about  lt apex  radarSeries gt  charts     Scatter Charts with  lt apex  scatterSeries gt     Use scatter charts to plot individual  n
21.  727 5555       New in Winter    13  D amp B Companies for Leads    In Summer 12  we introduced D amp B Companies for accounts  Winter 13 gives you D amp B Companies for leads     101    Data com Data com Product Suite Overview    The D amp B Companies object and related records are available to organizations that purchase Data com Premium  When you  add a lead from Data com   or clean a lead   a corresponding D amp B Company record  if one exists in Data com  is automatically  created in Salesforce and linked to that record via its D amp B Company field  Just click the link to open the D amp B Company  record and view the rich set of D amp B data  including a Company Description field  plus sections like Primary Data and  Firmographic Data     For example  if you add a lead record for Richard DijkstraatDomino   s Pizza LLC  when you open the lead record   the D amp B Company field value is Domino   s Pizza  LLC  The value is underlined to identify it as a link  Just click the  link to open the Domino   s Pizza LLC D amp B Company record     Data com Corporate  With Data com Corporate  all Salesforce users can search Data com for accounts and contacts  Users with Data com licenses  can       Add accounts and contacts to Salesforce  and add contacts as leads      Add contacts for an account directly from the account record      Access the basic set of D amp B fields provided for accounts and leads      Manually clean Salesforce account  contact  and lead records  whether they 
22.  E E E E E OE E E E EEE 103  Data com Administrator Features and Enhancement           csssssssssesseseseesesesseseseeaesescesesesaesesaescsecaesesacsececsesecaeeeesesseeeeeeeeaeeees 103  Datacom    User  Fnhianicements    secrccratstvssesauvasecyansseistysunsrataesnessveanetneenssgeaberaanaavaenseuuvsreaneenie a berimnm nanan enamine  107   Data corm  e eia A A T EA au weneereuanets 110  Data com Clean Administrator Features and Enhancement            sssscsssssssesesseseseeseseceseeeaeseeaescsecacsecaesececaeeeseeesceseeeeeeeeees 110  Data com Clean User Features and Enhancement           scssscssessessesesseeeceeencesceseeeeceneenseaesaeeeeeeneescesesaeeeeneeneesceaseeeeeeneeneees 113   D amp B Companies sess  sinies oiiaii anaana A En AN EEE EEO oueuea ossens as os oaseusstevtsestagsnevasevnns dudven tosses 116   D amp B Companies Administrator Features and Enhancements          c scessssseesesssesceeesenseseeeeeeceesssssesessssscacseacscaeesesananeeesess 116   D amp B Companies User Features and Enhancement          ccccceccccscssssesssseesssssecsesesesesesscscsesesesecssscessesesseecseseseseseseseesesssanenas 120  Site C OU sca scsnisaidicnininvenerencienereicienereiensnendennenaeneniasranncnaaiaiaiamnanrabeamamuakraiuaknaxbannaiie 127  Page  Breadcrumbs einen E EEE EEA TEETE E E E OER 127  Updated Menu Source  Options  iessccssersiscscsusssccevansvevsssvtetonvesnna AE NEA AEE TONE 127   Page Visibility in Menus and BreadcrumDBsissisiisivsesiisicresiinsiissiseeraseianis
23.  Editions    In an effort to improve the performance of sandbox copy  portal users are no longer copied to developer and configuration  sandboxes  Contacts  which are required by portal users  weren t copied to those sandbox types  Therefore  the functionality  of the sandbox remains the same without portal users  All portal licenses are still copied  so you can create portal users in your  sandbox if you need them     Eastern Name Order for Vietnamese Locales    Available in  Group  Professional  Enterprise  Unlimited  Developer  and Database com Editions    To view company information     View Setup and Configuration       To change company information     Customize Application          The available personal setup options vary according to which Salesforce Edition you have     The supported locales Vietnamese  vi  and Vietnamese  Vietnam   vi_VN  now display in Eastern name order  family name  first  throughout Salesforce     If you have existing reports run in organizations with Vietnamese or Vietnamese  Vietnam  as the locale and conditions on a  person   s name  such as Contact Name   you will need to update the report to have it display the new name order     Minor Branding Changes to User Interface Elements    In Winter 13  we made minor changes to the Aloha skin  We re now using more neutral colors for list views and related list  headers  If you have Visualforce pages that overrode the styling for list views or related list headers by adding CSS to the page   your p
24.  Enhancements Apex Code Enhancements    Sample    The following sample uses the get VariableValue method to obtain breadcrumb  navigation  information from the flow  embedded in the Visualforce page  If that flow contains subflow elements  and each of the referenced flows also contains a  vaBreadCrumb variable  the Visualforce page can provide users with breadcrumbs regardless of which flow the interview is    running     public class SampleContoller        Instance of the flow  public Flow Interview Flow Template Gallery myFlow  get  set       public String getBreadCrumb      String aBreadCrumb   if  myFlow  null    return  Home      else aBreadCrumb    String  myFlow getVariableValue  vaBreadCrumb        return  aBreadCrumb  null    Home   aBreadCrumb       New Network Class and Method    The Network class  which is used for the Communities pilot  represents a community     am      Note  Salesforce Communities is available through a pilot program  Contact your Salesforce com representative to    find out if your organization qualifies for the pilot   a    This class contains the getNetworkId method  The getNetworkId method returns the user   s current community  If  Communities isn   t enabled for the user   s organization or the user is currently in the internal organization  this method returns  null     New Messaging Method    The new sendEmailMessage method in the Messaging class allows up to 10 draft email messages to be sent  This method  is used with Case Feed       
25.  ExpectedRevenue  StartDate  ELSE Name  END  FROM Event       If the object type referenced by Event  What is an Account  the query returns the referenced Account   s Phone and  NumberOfEmployees fields  If the object type is an Opportunity  the query returns the referenced Opportunity   s Amount  and CloseDate fields  If the object type is a Campaign  the query returns the referenced Campaign   s ExpectedRevenue  and StartDate fields  Finally  if the object type is any other type  the Name field is returned           There are several considerations to keep in mind when using SOQL Polymorphism  See the TYPEOF and Understanding  Polymorphic Keys and Relationships sections of the Force com SOQL and SOSL Reference for more details     Geolocation Custom Field SOQL Queries   Beta    The geolocation custom field allows you to create a field that identifies a location by its latitude and longitude  You can then  use the geolocation field with the DISTANCE and GEOLOCATION formula functions to calculate distances between  locations  For example  you can calculate the distance between two geolocation fields  such as between the warehouse and the  store   or between a geolocation field and any fixed latitude longitude coordinates  such as between the warehouse and 37 775         122 418    also known as San Francisco     DISTANCE    Calculates the distance between two locations in miles or kilometers     163    Developer Console Enhancements API Enhancements    GEOLOCATION  Returns a 
26.  Flow Designer    Search controls have been added to the Palette and expanded in the Explorer to help you quickly find what you need to build  and update your flows     139    Visual Workflow Enhancements    Searching the Palette    As you add Apex classes that use the Process  Plugin interface and add more flows to your organization  it becomes more  challenging to find a specific Apex class or flow within the Palette  You can  however  search the Palette to quickly find what  you need to add an Apex plug in or subflow element to your flow     Available in  Enterprise  Unlimited  and Developer Editions       To open  edit  or create a flow in the Cloud Flow Designer     Manage Force com Flow       Open a flow in the Cloud Flow Designer  Then use the following options to find a Palette item     e On the Palette tab  enter search text   The Palette displays only the items that contain the entered text       Click A to filter the Palette tab contents to one type of element     To remove the filter  click A and select SEARCH ALL     Searching a Flow    As a flow grows and becomes more complex  it becomes more challenging to find things within it  The Cloud Flow Designer  offers tools for quickly finding flow elements and resources     Available in  Enterprise  Unlimited  and Developer Editions    To open  edit  or create a flow in the Cloud Flow Designer     Manage Force com Flow          Open the flow in the Cloud Flow Designer  Then use one or more of the following options to 
27.  Idea Themes    To create Idea Themes     Create    on Ideas       Click the Idea Themes tab to view  filter  moderate  and create themes from lists       Click Create New View to define your own custom list views  To edit or delete any view you created  select it from the  View drop down list and click Edit  If your organization has multiple communities  we recommend you add Community  to your views so that you can see the name of the community associated with each idea theme      ClickNew Idea Theme from the Idea Themes list view page or click New from the Recent Idea Themes list on the Idea  Themes overview page to create a new idea theme      Click    to refresh a list that   s been updated      Click Edit or Del to edit or delete an idea theme      Note  Deleting an idea theme also deletes the ideas that are associated with it  Conversely  undeleting an idea    theme also undeletes the ideas that are associated with it        Managing Idea Themes    Available in  Professional  Enterprise  Unlimited  and Developer Editions    To view the Idea Themes tab     Read    on Idea Themes    To create and edit Idea Themes     Create    on Ideas       From the Idea Themes detail page  you can manage an idea theme and its related ideas  As an administrator  you can perform  the following tasks       Edit  Delete  or Clone an idea theme   e Edit or Delete ideas that have been submitted to the idea theme          Move an idea from one idea theme to another in your communities     When
28.  More visible in the app menu    Object Settings   Permissions to access objects and  fields  and settings such as tab  availability    App Permissions   Permissions to perform app specific  actions  such as  Manage Call  Centers     Apex Class Access  Permissions to execute Apex classes    Visualforce Page Access  Permissions to execute Visualforce    pages    External Data Source Access  Permissions to authenticate against  External Data Sources    Data Category Visibility  Define access to data categories                82    Salesforce Knowledge Share Articles with Public Links    4  Click Edit next to the data category group you want to assign access to  Access to data categories is assigned to Permission  Sets and Profiles the same way is it for roles     5  Select Custom        Category Group  Visibility    Select the visibility of this category group for this permission set  What is this     Visibility    All Categories     None     Custom  Available Categories  Selected Categories   Expand All Collapse Al All  gt  iPhone     All  iPad      Touch          Save   Cancel       6  Select the categories you want the permission set or profile to have access to from the Available Categories list and  add them to the Selected Categories list     7  Click Save     For more information  see    About Category Group Visibility    in the online help   Share Articles with Public Links    You asked for it  This enhancement is from an idea on the IdeaExchange     Available in  Enter
29.  N S Number field value  transfers to the account   s D U N S Number field  and the lead   s D amp B Company field value  transfers to the account   s D  B Company field     e The lead   s Data com Key field value transfers to the contacts Data com Key field     If you use Data com Corporate  no D amp B Company record is created  but the lead   s Data  com Key  field value transfers to the contact   s Data com Key field     Divisions The new account  contact  and opportunity are assigned to the same division as the lead  If you update  an existing account during lead conversion  the account   s division is not changed  and the new contact  and opportunity inherit the account   s division     Local Lead Names The Company Name  Local  onthe lead automatically maps to Account Name  Local   along  with their associated standard name fields     Person Accounts If your organization uses person accounts  you can convert leads to either person accounts or business  accounts  Leads with a blank Company field are converted to person accounts  The default person  account record type for your profile is applied to the new person account  Note that you can only  create leads with a blank Company field using the Force com API  Leads with a value in the Company  field are converted to business accounts  The default business account record type for your profile is  applied to the new business account     As a best practice  use different lead record types and page layouts to differentiate le
30.  Patch Versions    in the online help     To schedule a push upgrade     1  Log in to your main development organization    2  Under Your Name  gt  Setup  gt  Create  gt  Packages  click the name of the managed package whose upgrade you want to  push  On the package detail page  click the Versions tab  and then click Push Upgrades    3  Click Schedule Push Upgrades     4  Select a package version to push from the Patch Version drop down list   gm Note  Beta versions aren   t eligible for push     ee    5  Enter a Scheduled Start Date  indicating when a push upgrade should begin     6  Inthe Select Target Organizations section  select the organizations to receive your push upgrade  If an organization already  received a push upgrade for the selected package version  it won t appear in this list  You can select organizations by       Entering a term that filters based on an organization   s name or ID  Names can match by partial string  but  Ds must  match exactly       Choosing between production and sandbox organizations from the Organizations drop down list     Choosing organizations that have already installed a particular version     Clicking on individual organizations  or the Select All and Deselect A11 checkboxes     This section lists the following information about the organization  in alphabetical order      Current Version The current package version an organization has installed     Organization ID The ID that uniquely identifies the organization to  salesforce com
31.  To learn more about static resources  see    Defining Static Resources    in the Salesforce online help     173    Developer Console Enhancements Apex Code Enhancements    Next  create an instance of StaticResourceCalloutMock and set the static resource  and any other properties     StaticResourceCalloutMock mock   new StaticResourceCalloutMock       mock setStaticResource   myStaticResourceName      mock setStatusCode  200      mock setHeader  Content Type       application json       In your test method  call Test  setMock to set the mock callout mode and pass it HttpCalloutMock class as the first  argument  and the variable name that you created for Stat icResourceCalloutMock as the second argument     Test setMock  HttpCalloutMock class  mock      After this point  if your test method performs a callout  the callout is not made and the Apex runtime sends the mock response  you specified in your instance of StaticResourceCalloutMock           Note  Ifthe code that performs the callout is in a managed package  you must call Test   setMock from a test method    in the same package with the same namespace to mock the callout   a    This is a full example containing the test method  testCalloutWithStaticResources  and the method it is testing   get InfoFromExternalService  that performs the callout  Before running this example  create a static resource named  mockResponse based on a text file with the content   hah   fooled you    Save each class separately and run the  test 
32.  Users will also notice  that we replaced the Recipient column with the reinstated From To column on the My Unresolved Items page         Chatter Profile Groups Files Leads Accounts Contacts Opportunities Reports Dashboards Products Forecasts        My Unresolved Items                   n Contacts Events Emails Tasks Email to Salesforce Settings    Unresolved Items  Save Cancel Batch Edit       Subject Date t Fromo Assign to Salesforce com Records    No records to display F 7 19 2012   mrigsby unioncontainers com    Contact z  Q    Account z     Promising 10 01 AM gjohnson centurycontainers com  leads    DontAssign      Recycle Bin Save     Cancel          54    Shared Activities Enhancements Shared Activities for Events    SHARED ACTIVITIES ENHANCEMENTS    Shared Activities for Events    Available in  All Editions except Database com     To view activity settings     View Setup and Configuration       To customize activity settings     Customize Application            You asked for it  This enhancement addresses ideas on the IdeaExchange     Winter 713 expands Shared Activities to let your users relate as many as 10 contacts to a single non recurring event  One  contact is the primary contact and all others are secondary contacts  This allows your users to easily track the overall activity  and the individual contact activities for the event  It also allows your users to generate useful and accurate activity metrics  reports that include the number of contacts related to an 
33.  also notified     If posting from a Chatter group or a standard record page  for example  Leads  Accounts  Opportunities  Cases  and so on    the post is made to that group   s or record   s wall  Anyone who follows the group or record sees the post in their feed  The  recipient of the Thanks post is always notified     Viewing Work com Profile Content in Chatter    If Work com has been enabled for your organization and your administrator has also enabled the display of Work com profile  content in Chatter profiles  you ll see a Work com button on the left side when viewing a Chatter profile  including your  own   This allows you to see someone   s Work com profile in addition to their Chatter profile        Note  The first time you click Work com  you ll be required to sign in using your Work com username and password   which are separate from your login credentials for Salesforce  If you don   t have a Work com account  you can sign up  for one from this login screen  After logging in to Work com  you ll be asked to approve the connection between  Salesforce and Work com  Click Approve to complete this process     When viewing a Work com profile  including your own   you can browse and interact with the content shown there     Administrator Settings for Rich Media Previews    You can now enable or disable rich media previews in link posts  Post with links to rich media content are rendered as a  preview  including thumbnails  descriptions and video players for video URLs  
34.  click     to move the classes to the Selected Test Classes pane     To select multiple adjacent classes  select a single class and press the SHIFT key while you click the classes you want to  select  To select nonadjacent classes  select a single class and press the CTRL key while you click the other classes you  want to select  You can also click Select All     5  When you ve created a test run  click Run to queue and run the classes     148    Developer Console Enhancements Tests Tool          Note  Ifyour test methods call other methods or classes defined as tests in your organization  those methods and  classes are also run     z  6  To stop a test  click Abort   7  In theTests tab  expand the test run to see the results for each method invoked by each class in the run     8  The Overall Code Coverage pane displays the percentage of code coverage for each every class in your organization  The  pane always displays the current percentage for every class  After you perform a test run  the pane also displays the overall  percentage in bold       Note  Test classes don   t require code coverage  Therefore  test classes show 0  coverage and don   t affect the  q 8 g  overall code coverage percentage        9  Double click the completed test run to open the results in a Tests view     The Tests view displays the tested class  the tested method  the duration  result  skip  pass  or fail   and an optional error  message  If a test failed  a Stack Trace column shows the method an
35.  control over who may use the application  and various security policies which  should be enforced     Connected Applications begin with a developer defining OAuth metadata about the application  including       Basic descriptive and contact information for the connected application    The OAuth scopes and callback URL for the connected application    Optional IP ranges where the connected application might be running      Optional information about mobile policies the connected application can enforce    In return  the developer is provided an OAuth client ID and client secret  as well as an install URL for the connected application   The developer can then provide this URL to a Salesforce administrator     The administrator can install the connected application into their organization and use profiles  permission sets  and IP range  restrictions to control which users can access the application  Management is done from a detail page for the connected  application  The administrator can also uninstall the connected application and install a newer version  When the app is  updated  the developer can notify administrators that there is a new version available for the app     their existing installation  URL installs the new version     For more information  see the Connected Application Tip Sheet     Force com Canvas   Pilot    Available in  Developer Editions    This feature is visible to all users in new Development Edition organizations  To enable this feature in existing D
36.  event where     lt  pre gt                     else    document  getElementBylId  responseErrors   innerHTML   event message                           escape  true     3      lt   SioseaLone gt     You asked for it  This enhancement is from an idea on the IdeaExchange     In Winter    13 you can add an option to the remoting request configuration array to prevent automatic buffering of requests   JavaScript remoting optimizes requests that are executed close to each other in time and groups the calls into a single request   This buffering improve the efficiency of the overall request and response cycle  but sometimes it   s useful to ensure all requests    execute independently     To disable buffering in the previous example  add buffer  false to the configuration block    escape  true  buffer  false     When a  RemoteAction method is looked up or called  Visualforce inspects the page controller   s inheritance hierarchy and  finds  RemoteAction methods in the controller   s ancestor classes     196    Developer Console Enhancements Additional Visualforce Enhancements    Here   s an example demonstrating this capability  The following Apex classes form a three tier inheritance hierarchy     global with sharing class ChildRemoteController  extends ParentRemoteController       global virtual with sharing class ParentRemoteController  extends GrandparentRemoteController        global virtual with sharing class GrandparentRemoteController     RemoteAction  global static String 
37.  glass  Slowly drag the magnifying glass through the field until you  see the desired text     On the Chatter tab  you can   t       Create or update profile information  or upload profile pictures     See the Followers  Following  Groups  and Files Owned lists on profiles     See Chatter activity statistics or Chatter influence status     Receive Chatter recommendations     See trending topics     Invite coworkers to sign up for Chatter     Update group settings and information     Create new groups     View members of groups or lists of group files     Invite Chatter customers to join private groups     Upload  share  or preview files     View or download files that were uploaded via the Files tab from the full site  or that were uploaded to a comment   Note  that you can view files that were attached to a post on a Chatter feed  The Salesforce Touch downloadable app can display  these file types only   doc   docx   pdf   ppt   pptx   xls    xlsx  and all image files  including  gif    jpg  and    png formats       Find or follow files     Send or view Chatter messages     Bookmark posts     View the list of people who liked a Chatter update     Share public posts     Add or view Chatter favorites   e Add topics to posts and comments     Search for data in any Chatter feeds  including Groups  People  and Files     View the full Chatter feed  as with the Feed filter in the full site       Filter or follow records    e Use Chatter as a moderator    Salesforce Mobile SDK    Th
38.  href  javascript void 0     onclick  sforce interaction entityFeed refreshObject     case id    true  true  true   function response   alert  Case was updated      response result       gt Refresh Case lt  a gt    lt  apex page gt     67    Chatter Answers Encouraging Community Participation with Chatter Answers Reputation    Response    This method is asynchronous so it returns its response in an object in a callback method  The response object contains the  following fields     true if the Case Feed page was successfully updated  false if it was not        CHATTER ANSWERS    Encouraging Community Participation with Chatter  Answers Reputation    Available in  Enterprise and Unlimited Editions    Tap into the expertise and knowledge of your most active community members by rewarding their activity  By enabling  reputations  you let users earn points and ratings that display on hover over a user   s photo in the feed  As your star posters  engage more frequently  they improve the overall content in your community and provide better answers for users who are  searching for help with an issue  This means that users who are searching for a solution can be confident that an answer from  a community expert can be trusted  which means fewer support calls for your organization     New here     Have an account     Sign In Antony Passemard    need 4 webcams in the same room  one per person   Is this possible     J 11  2012   Like Follow 0  Q Open Questions Q E Sarah Patel    We did t
39.  http    api salesforce com foo sfdc    mockResponse2      multimock setStatusCode  200     multimock setHeader  Content Type       application json          175    Developer Console Enhancements Apex Code Enhancements       Set the mock callout mode  Test setMock  HttpCalloutMock class  multimock          Call the method for the first endpoint   HTTPResponse res   CalloutMultiStaticClass getInfoFromExternalService     http   api salesforce com foo bar         Verify response received   System assertEquals    hah   fooled you     res getBody              Call the method for the second endpoint   HTTPResponse res2   CalloutMultiStaticClass getInfoFromExternalService     http   api salesforce com foo sfdc         Verify response received   System assertEquals    hah   fooled you twice     res2 getBody           Testing Web Service Callouts    Generated code is saved as an Apex class containing the methods you can invoke for calling the Web service  To deploy or  package this Apex class and other accompanying code  75  of the code must have test coverage  including the methods in the  generated class  By default  test methods don   t support Web service callouts and tests that perform Web service callouts are  skipped  To prevent tests from being skipped and to increase code coverage  Apex provides the built in WebServiceMock  interface and the Test  setMock method that you can use to receive fake responses in a test method     Specifying a Mock Response for Testing Web Service 
40.  ieie dite enoe ai aeiae aa ia aiena Nee ENSEN TENE E dennis 13  Mobile Enhancements ieasiertesnsteore orie estes eiere ATENENT AEAEE E EE LS EAE AROE RAEE E ESSEET E TEER 14  Data com New Features and Enhancements          sccsccesssssesssesesseessessecsecsceececseesaecsessceseecsessesssesaeesscaseseesaseaessesenenaecaeeeaeeaeeaaeegs 14  Sitecom  Enhancements enen R eat esesssdaecevatsaiaveesaeves E E EEES 16  Force com Enhancements cscs cscs sieees eae das esetaes cds sean tune eve ce cas agente vk hates aa ea EER Ea EEEE aara AEE RAG Hace 17  General Pahancements   cc0cccticcieic cunt anciidawiounnGancdba cid Guiana daniaioan 25  Sal  store   Communities   PilOt siecccssiscecossesvadscasondsaevneveecausveuvbesunoansevesootees vaovuncavdconseegsessnedep iavdevoarvenbeavesosaecdecversoevabensevariaeraaiodes 25  Browser Enbancements ivic ceccsecciecslessdesteqesvaeitienn da Sie a Sodveledie ies dtdevetaets Mee aa Ea aE SER EE ESE E E e a eea E a as 25  RETRACT ET cicctscisoaice sawaieneicieucisaisaousdioasesieed EEN ET E E EEEE 26  POMS EEE E EA A E A O TA T O E AA TEE EE 26  Chatter Tab Navigation  Enhancements oserei iranienne a A ENA ROEE EE 26  Chatter Influence Calculation Enhancement isiin E E E E E a iaeaea e Eei 27  Improved Posting Experience   iiare e ir e ia errai Ee SE S EE Na AEE EREN Ea ESATA TASEESEEN 28  Chatter Desktop  EnhancementSorsroornaris isinen n aeae Eene CEEE A ESNE 28  Preview VAm ks   lt cszccleatesuvsvsgedsacssiteecescoecdaadessaseobvaeWesdes iqau
41.  isn   t officially  supported     There are some differences from the full site when creating or editing records                 Any Record You can   t modify a record   s owner or its record type  Switch to the full site to make y  these changes   If territory management is enabled  you can   t assign or modify a record   s territory y y  rules     96    Mobile Salesforce Touch    Accounts and The Copy Billing Address to Shipping Address and Copy Mailing Address to  Contacts Other Address links aren t available     If territory management is enabled  the Evaluate this account against territory  rules on save option isn   t available when editing account records     Events You can   t create or edit event records in Salesforce Touch     Opportunities You can   t edit the Probability or Forecast Category fields  However   values are automatically added to these fields  based on the value of the Stage  field  when you save the record  You can manually override the values for these  fields by editing the record in the full site     If you make an opportunity private  you don   t get a warning that you   re removing  all sharing from the record     If you set the Name field to Lead  the Related To field shouldn   t be available  but it   s editable in Salesforce Touch  You ll get a validation error if there   s data in  Related To when you save the record        The Email and Phone fields for an associated contact aren   t displayed   You can   t use Shared Activities to relate 
42.  layout  block  html data role  panel  html data id  main  gt    lt apex insert name  main   gt    lt  apex outputPanel gt         lt  apex page gt     197    Developer Console Enhancements Additional Visualforce Enhancements    This produces the following HTML output      lt  DOCTYPE HTML gt      lt html gt     lt head gt       lt  head gt     lt div id       data id  menu  data role  panel  gt    lt     contents of menu    gt     lt  div gt     lt div id       data id  main  data role  panel  gt    lt     contents of main    gt     lt  div gt     lt  html gt     Every attribute that begins with    html     is passed through to the resulting HTML  with the    html     removed     am   Note  Pass through attributes that conflict with built in attributes for  lt apex  outputPanel gt  will generate a  compilation error     For additional considerations and examples of using HTML attributes  see Setting Custom HTML Attributes on Visualforce  Components in the Viswalforce Developer s Guide     Support for Internet Explorer Conditional Comments    Prior to Winter 713  HTML and XML comments were allowed in Visualforce pages but were automatically removed during  page rendering  This included Internet Explorer specific    conditional comments    that are often used to address browser  compatibility issues  In Winter 13  these comments are recognized by Visualforce and passed through to the browser     This change is versioned  and you must update your Visualforce pages to API versio
43.  mind       This validation rule generates entries and related messages in Data com Clean job logs  but your jobs may generate  other entries and errors  as well  so make sure you examine your job logs carefully     1  Download and install the Datacom Reports AppExchange package     2  For each object you run Clean jobs on  edit your page layouts to add the Data com Does Not Auto Update checkbox   so it   s available to users     t      9 Tip  You can use the Data Loader or a custom trigger to select this checkbox for multiple records     3  Open each record that you do not want to be auto updated  and select the Do Not Auto Update checkbox     112    Data com Clean Data com Clean User Features and Enhancements    When automated jobs run  for each record that is not updated  you ll see a message in the job log     This record has  been excluded from automated field updates from Data com Clean jobs        Data com Clean Product Automatically Enabled    In Summer    12  when you implemented the Data com Clean product  you had to enable it before you could set up automated  Clean jobs and users could manually clean account  contact  and lead records  With Winter    13  weve eliminated that extra  step and enabled the Data com Clean product for you  To take a look  just go to Your Name  gt  Setup  gt  Data com  Administration  gt  Clean  gt  Settings  For complete details  check out    Implementing Data com Clean    in the Salesforce online  help     Data com Corporate and Premiu
44.  on Help  URLs in  lt apex  sectionHeader gt        23    Force com Enhancements    ISVforce Enhancements    Push Major Upgrade       Environment Hub   Pilot       Additional Force com Enhancements    Workflow Evaluation Criteria Usability  Enhancements       Geolocation Custom Field   Beta    Custom Object Truncation          Retention Policy for Unused Sandboxes       Full Sandbox Configuration       Portal Users Not in Developer and  Configuration Sandboxes       Eastern Name Order for Vietnamese  Locales    Minor Branding Changes to User    Interface Elements       Updates to Platform Portal User Licenses       24    GENERAL ENHANCEMENTS    Salesforce Communities  Pilot          Note  Salesforce Communities is available through a pilot program  Contact your Salesforce com representative to  find out if your organization qualifies for the pilot     Communities are customizable public or private spaces for employees  end customers  and partners to collaborate on best  practices and business processes  You can create multiple communities within your organization for different purposes  For  example  you could create a community for your company and its partners to discuss channel business  or you could have a  community specifically dedicated to an upcoming event     You can customize communities to meet your business needs  including   Choosing which members from your company and which customers  partners  or other people outside your company can  join  Selecting which Sale
45.  on the go and avoid time consuming catch up work at the end of the  day     This section highlights some of the key features that make Salesforce Touch a great choice for use when out of the office     91    Mobile Salesforce Touch    wv Opportunities    Recently Viewed Opportunities  Actions v    Edge  500 cases  10  Recycled Pr      Edge Com    e   1 31 2013 Opportunity Owner Account Name Type Edit   Fred Williamsq Edge Communic    Existing Busings  S   RR Univ  2 500 cases  Laser Print     Create Task      Details Chatter Related    View in Full Site    Pull to Refresh     _    _      Burlington Textiles  20 000 cases      Last Updated 8 6 2012 at 12 36 PM    Opportunity Owner Close Date    Lux Hotels  5 000 cases  Columnar    Ered Neeer anon 4312013    Opportunity Name Stage    Edge  500 cases  10  Recycled Value Proposition  GenePoint  8 000 cases  30  Recy    Premium Pastels    Account Name Probability        Lux Hotels  15 000 cases  10  Re    Edge Communications  Inc  50     Type Amount    Existing Business  50 000 00    RR Univ  1 000 cases  Premium Bo       Primary Campaign Source    Lux Hotels  20 000 cases  Laser Pr          1  View  edit  and create records for any object that has a tab in the Salesforce Sales app  including your organization   s custom  objects     Keep on top of activities by creating and managing tasks   Search Salesforce for information  including events and records not in recently viewed lists    Use Chatter to see record updates and to col
46.  or ads  which let you extend  your branding and change the community experience for users  The page you create must include the  chatteranswers allfeeds component to display the community  After users log in to one of your portals  they can access  Chatter Answers from a tab and interact with that community  When you add Chatter Answers using a Visualforce page   users only see the community that is related to the page  they can   t switch communities as they can when using the standard  Chatter Answers tab on a portal     am        Note  The Visualforce page is visible to portal users only  Internal users can see the Chatter Answers tab  but need  to log in through the portal to view the contents of the tab using the portal     Adding a Custom Visualforce Page to a Portal    Available in  Enterprise and Unlimited Editions       To set up and update the Customer Portal     Customize Application       To add a custom Visualforce tab to a portal     1  Click Your Name  gt  Setup  gt  Create  gt  Tabs to display a list of your organization   s Visualforce tabs     69    Chatter Answers Creating Questions from the Questions Tab    Click New to create a new Visualforce tab    Select the Visualforce page and add details for the other fields on the page   Click Next    Select which user profiles can see the tab    Select the portals that will include the new tab     Sy Se SS    Creating Questions from the Questions Tab    Available in  Enterprise  Unlimited  and Developer Editions 
47.  removes the listener  or the  listener is removed by another user     Returns page information for the specified tab after its content  has loaded  If the tab ID is null  it returns page information  for the enclosing primary tab or subtab        Returns all of the IDs of open primary tabs        Returns all of the IDs of the subtabs on the primary tab  specified by a primary tab ID  If the primary tab ID is null  it  returns the IDs of the subtabs on the current primary tab           Removes a listener that gets added for a push notification     For more information  English only  about the toolkit  see the Service Cloud Console Integration Toolkit Developer s Guide     Editing Replies to Questions    In Winter 13  moderators can edit replies to questions that are posted to the community  When you select a question from    the Questions tab  click    on one of the question   s replies and select Edit to edit the fields in an existing reply            Case  00002582 on 5 8 2012    supporting IES     February 24 12 Answer    seeing any issues at this time    Sarah Patel       gt  In  Community Legacy Answers  When will IE8 be supported     We are currently using IE7 and would like to move to IES  When will you begin    Thanks for the reply  My team has already migrated to IEE    February 24  2012   amp  Best Answer       Delete    Promote to Aricie    Edit       Sarah Patel f  Thanks Mark  OK  I think we will proceed with caution  but ifs very comforting  to know that things 
48.  responseName   String responseType     docSample EchoStringResponse element respElement    new docSample EchoStringResponse element      respElement EchoStringResult    Mock response    response put   response x   respElement          This is the method that makes a Web service callout     public class WebSvcCallout    PWOLLE stracie Serine callichogri ing  Siticime wowe  docSample DocSamplePort sample   new docSample DocSamplePort      sample endpoint_x    http   api salesforce com foo bar         This invokes the EchoString method in the generated class  String echo   sample EchoString  input       return echo     This is the test class containing the test method that sets the mock callout mode  It calls the cal EchoString method in  the previous class and verifies that a mock response is received         isTest  private class WebSvcCalloutTest     isTest static void testEchoString         This causes a fake response to be generated  Test setMock  WebServiceMock class  new WebServiceMockImpl            177    Developer Console Enhancements Apex Code Enhancements       Call the method that invokes a callout  String output   WebSvcCallout callEchoString  Hello World           Verify that a fake result is returned  System assertEquals  Mock response   output      Chatter API   Connect in Apex  Pilot     Force com developers no longer need to use Apex callouts to access Chatter API data  Now  many Chatter API resources  have been exposed and are directly accessible using Conne
49.  system automatically maps standard lead fields to standard account  contact  and opportunity  Lead Fields fields  see    Lead Conversion Mapping    in the online help      For custom lead fields  your administrator can specify how they map to custom account  contact  and  opportunity fields  see    Mapping Custom Lead Fields    in the online help      The system assigns the default picklist values for the account  contact  and opportunity when mapping  standard lead picklist fields that are blank  If your organization uses record types  blank values are  replaced with the default picklist values of the new record owner     Territory Management Ifyour organization uses territory management  the new account is evaluated by account assignment  rules and may be assigned to one or more territories  If the rules assign the account to exactly one  territory  then the opportunity will also be assigned to that territory  If the rules assign the account  to multiple territories  then the opportunity is not assigned to any territory     Triggers During lead convert  Apex triggers are fired  and universally required custom fields and validation  rules are enforced  only if validation and triggers for lead convert are enabled in your organization        Salesforce ignores lookup filters when converting leads ifthe Enforce Validation and Triggers  from Lead Convert checkbox on the Lead Settings page is deselected     Workflow You can   t convert a lead that   s associated with an active a
50.  the Share button above the feed changed from blue to green and the sidebar on the Chatter  tab now uses gray icons     h  Feed  What   Follow    To Me    post  amp  Fic Link Poll    Bookmarked  Share  All Company    33    Additional Chatter Enhancements Chatter Feed Search Label Change    Chatter Feed Search Label Change    In keeping with changes to the Chatter tab navigation  we ve renamed Search Chatter Updates to Search Chatter Feeds on  the global search results page     View the External Apps Approved to Access Chatter Data    Available in  Group  Professional  Enterprise  Unlimited  Contact Manager  and Developer Editions       If your organization has Chatter Free users  Chatter Only users  or customers in Chatter groups  Winter 13 offers them  approved connections  a new security feature  Whenever they authorize an external app such as Chatter Desktop or Chatter  Mobile  they can now see these apps listed in Chatter  for added security     Approved connections is the list of external applications that can access your data in Chatter  You authorize this access the  first time you run the external application  For example  if you use Chatter Desktop  you created a connection between the  Chatter Desktop application and the login you use to access Chatter on the Web  The first time you authorized the connection  in Chatter Desktop  it was saved as an approved connection  To view your approved connections  click Your Name  gt  My  Settings at the top of any page  then c
51.  the flow that   s embedded in the Visualforce page  If  that flow contained subflow elements  the values of variables in the referenced flows could not be obtained by the Visualforce  controllers     The new getVariableValue method in the Flow  Interview class enables a Visualforce controller to get the value of a  flow variable  The variable may be in the flow embedded in the Visualforce page  or in a separate flow that is called by a subflow  element  See New getVariableValue Method on page 187     142    Visual Workflow Enhancements Flow Navigation Options    Flow Navigation Options    Available in  Enterprise  Unlimited  and Developer Editions    At runtime  the system automatically determines which of the Next  Previous  and Finish buttons are relevant for each screen   depending on whether there are any preceding or following screens in the flow path  The new Navigation Options field  on the Screen overlay enables you to restrict a screen from displaying either the Previous or Finish button     Options     No navigation restrictions    Default  The system displays all relevant navigation buttons on the screen       Don   tshow Previous button   Select this option if revisiting the previous screen triggers an action that musn   t be repeated   such as a credit card transaction     Don   t show Finish button   Select this option if you need the user to go back to a previous screen to continue or complete  the flow     For example  suppose the flow prompts the user to ent
52.  the following when converting leads     121    D amp B Companies D amp B Companies User Features and Enhancements       Campaigns If the lead matches an existing contact and both records are linked to the same campaign  the campaign    member status is determined by whichever is further along in the lifecycle of the campaign  For  example  if the lead member status is    sent    and the contact member status is    responded     the  responded value is applied to the contact     Related campaign information is always associated with the new contact record  regardless of the  user s sharing access to the campaign     When more than one campaign is associated with a lead  the most recently associated campaign is  applied to the Primary Campaign Source field on the opportunity  regardless of the user s sharing  access to the campaign     Chatter When you convert a lead into an existing account  you don   t automatically follow that account   However  when you convert the lead into a new account  you automatically follow the new account   unless you disabled feed tracking for accounts in your Chatter settings     Data com   D amp B    Ifyou use Data com Premium  when you add a lead from Data com  a corresponding D amp B Company  Company    record  if one exists in Data com  is automatically created in Salesforce and linked to the lead record  via its D amp B Company field  If you later convert that lead        Ifthe account is created from the conversion  the lead   s Company D U
53.  the online help and in our developer guides at Developer  Force  includes a feedback form for you to submit your suggestions  corrections  and feedback about the documentation   Let us know what you think      IdeaExchange   We te listening to your ideas too  Winter  13 includes some of your top ideas  Visit IdeaExchange for a  complete list of ideas coming in Winter  13     Want to be notified whenever we publish new documentation or make significant updates to existing documentation  Follow  us on Twitter   salesforcedocs     Release Notes Changes    Release Notes Changes    Welcome to the Release Notes Change Log  Anything that   s changed with each new iteration of the release notes is right  here  with the newest updates at the top        January 3  2013 Browser Enhancements Added a note to the Browser Enhancements section to clarify that  Internet Explorer 10 is not supported for the Service Cloud console     January 3  2013 Chatter Reporting and Chatter API Updated the description of reports for hashtag     topics and of  Objects the HashtagDefinition object to include hashtags used only in  public posts and comments and not those used on records or in  private groups     November 21  Help and Training Enhancements   Added information on help portal change for sandbox and DE  2012 users  as well as for additional languages     Added a description of the new case collaboration feature     Changed title of    Usability Enhancements    section to    Help  and Training Po
54.  the record meets the rule criteria     am Note  You can t add time dependent actions to the rule if you select this        option     created  and any time it   s  Default  Evaluate the rule criteria each time a record is created or updated     edited to subsequently meet   For a new record  run the rule if the rule criteria is met     criteria   Foran updated record  run the rule only if the record is changed from not meeting    the rule criteria to meeting the rule criteria     With this option  the rule can run multiple times per record  but it won   t run when  the record edits are unrelated to the rule criteria     For example  suppose that for an opportunity record to meet the rule criteria  the  opportunity probability must be greater than 50   If you create an opportunity with  a probability of 75   the workflow rule runs  If you edit that opportunity by changing  the probability to 25   the edit doesn   t cause the rule to run  If you then edit that  opportunity by changing the probability from 25  to 75   the edit causes the rule  to run  With this last edit  the rule runs because the record is changed from not  meeting the rule criteria to meeting the rule criteria        Custom Object Truncation    Available in  Contact Manager  Group  Professional  Enterprise  Unlimited  Developer  and Database com Editions    To truncate custom objects     Customize Application          Truncating custom objects is a fast way to permanently remove all of the records from a cust
55.  to Winter 09 were    Developer Preview    releases  To migrate to the latest  Force com IDE from a    Developer Preview    release  delete all Force com projects from your workspace  uninstall the  k older IDE plug in from Eclipse  and install the latest release     157    Developer Console Enhancements Connected Applications   Pilot    Connected Applications   Pilot    Available in  Developer Editions    This feature is visible to all users in new Development Edition organizations  To enable this feature in existing Development    Edition organizations or other organizations  contact salesforce com        sm Note  The Connected Applications feature is currently available through a pilot program  For information on enabling  it for your organization  contact Salesforce  Any unreleased services or features referenced in this or other press releases  or public statements are not currently available and may not be delivered on time or at all  Customers who purchase  our services should make their purchase decisions based upon features that are currently available    A Connected Application  or Connected App  is an application that can connect to salesforce com over identity and data  APIs  Connected Applications use the standard OAuth 2 0 protocol to authenticate  provide Single Sign On  and acquire  access tokens for use with Salesforce APIs  In addition to standard OAuth capabilities  Connected Applications add additional    levels of control  allowing administrators explicit
56.  to all the resources in the documentation  as well as all request bodies and response bodies   Now it   s easier to see when something new is added to Chatter API      The rate limits for Chatter API have been more finely tuned and are measured by per user  per application  per hour rate  limit  Most customers shouldn   t see the difference  When you exceed the rate limit  all Chatter API resources return a 503  Service Unavailable error code for both the user and the application  When polling for feed updates or private messages   do not exceed one poll per minute  60 per hour   In addition  use the  feeds news me   userId is modified  resource to determine if a feed has been updated since the last specified time and date     35    Additional Chatter Enhancements Chatter REST API Enhancements      Chatter in Communities is supported by all the resources in Chatter API  Instead of using the regular URL to access the  resource  use the Community URL  For example        https   nal salesforce com services data v26 0 connect   communities communityId chatter feeds news me feed items       In addition  information about communities is returned by many of the response bodies     am    Note  Communities are available as a pilot program  Contact your salesforce com representative to find out if  your organization qualifies for the community pilot     Chatter API   Connect in Apex  Pilot     Force com developers no longer need to use Apex callouts to access Chatter API data  Now  ma
57.  use to test callouts by specifying the  response body in a static resource for each endpoint  This class is similar to Stat icResourceCalloutMock except that it  allows you to specify multiple response bodies  When using this class  you don   t have to provide your own implementation of  the HttpCalloutMock interface  Instead  just create an instance of MultiStaticResourceCalloutMock and set the  static resource to use per endpoint  You can also set other response properties like the status code and content type     First  you must create a static resource from a text file to contain the response body  See the procedure outlined in Testing  HTTP Callouts Using Stat icResourceCalloutMock     Next  create an instance of MultiStaticResourceCalloutMock and set the static resource  and any other properties     MultiStaticResourceCalloutMock multimock   new MultiStaticResourceCalloutMock     multimock setStaticResource  http   api salesforce com foo bar    mockResponse      multimock setStaticResource  http   api salesforce com foo sfdc    mockResponse2      multimock setStatusCode  200      multimock setHeader  Content Type      application json       In your test method  call Test  setMock to set the mock callout mode and pass it HttpCalloutMock class as the first  argument  and the variable name that you created for Mult iStaticResourceCalloutMock as the second argument     Test setMock  HttpCalloutMock class  multimock       After this point  if your test method performs an HT
58.  you edit an idea  you can change the name of the idea theme  which removes the idea from the current idea theme  and moves it to another idea theme that you select     75    Live Agent Enhancements Auto Away Option in Live Agent Configurations      Create an idea and post it to the idea theme in which you re working     Customize Idea Themes    Available in  Professional  Enterprise  Unlimited  and Developer Editions    To create or change custom buttons and links     Customize Application       To add custom page layouts     Customize Application          With Winter    13  administrators can display a custom view of the Idea Themes detail  edit  and list view pages  Administrators  can create custom page layouts  add custom fields  and add buttons and links to Idea Themes       When you override the default page layout  you can use Visualforce pages to create different page layouts for Idea Themes       By adding custom buttons and links to the Idea Themes detail page  you can add external URLs and access to applications  and other modules        Add custom fields to tailor your Idea Themes to your organization   s unique requirements       Use triggers to create workflow rules or actions for Idea Themes  For example  you can use triggers to change the status  of an idea theme once it has reached the end date     LIVE AGENT ENHANCEMENTS    Auto Away Option in Live Agent Configurations    Available in  Enterprise and Unlimited Editions  and Developer Edition organizations c
59.  you see in the office  but organized for working  while on the go        Note  This release doesn   t have all of the functionality of the full Salesforce site  See Differences from the Full  Salesforce Site on page 95 for more details     Salesforce Touch provides these benefits     An intuitive interface that is optimized for easy navigation and data interaction on an iPad  so you can scroll  tap  and  swipe through records to quickly find the information you need    Automatic updates and enhancements  so you re always using the most current version    Support for many of your organization   s Salesforce customizations  There are two versions of Salesforce Touch     A downloadable app that is available from the Apple App Store or AppExchange Mobile and installs directly on iPad    devices    A mobile browser app that runs in the Safari   for iPad web browser    The downloadable app offers the convenience and time savings of maintaining your Salesforce session  so you don   t need to  log in every time you access Salesforce Touch  Use the mobile browser version if you don   t want to bother with installing an  app on your device     Salesforce Touch Features Overview    Brush up on the status of deals or notes about contacts before customer meetings  Update records with new information while  the details are fresh  Rally team members back at the office to start working on a customer request  These are just a few of the    ways Salesforce Touch helps your users be productive
60. API version 25 0 and earlier  To access new fields  metadata types  and other components  or features introduced in API version 26 0 and later  use the Cloud Flow Designer to create your flows     Desktop Flow Designer Links and Documentation    Many flow administrators  almost all of whom use the Cloud Flow Designer  have been confused by the presence of legacy  desktop Flow Designer links and documentation     Therefore  we consolidated all legacy desktop Flow Designer   specific content in the user manual that is bundled with the  desktop Flow Designer  You can access this content from within the desktop Flow Designer by clicking Help  gt  User manual     We also removed the following options from the Flows list page       Upload flows that were created in the legacy desktop Flow Designer     Download the latest version of the legacy desktop Flow Designer     144       Schema Builder Enhancements Deleting Custom Objects with Schema Builder    You can contact salesforce com to re enable these options for your organizations  If you had previously uploaded flows that  were created in the legacy desktop Flow Designer  the Upload button might already continue to appear in your organization     SCHEMA BUILDER ENHANCEMENTS    Deleting Custom Objects with Schema Builder    To delete custom objects in Schema Builder   Customize Application        You can now delete custom object with Schema Builder     Schema Builder displays list of side effects when you try to delete a custom obj
61. Callouts    When you create an Apex class from a WSDL  the methods in the auto generated class call WebServiceCallout  invoke   which performs the callout to the external service  When testing these methods  you can instruct the Apex runtime to generate  a fake response whenever WebServiceCallout  invoke is called  To do so  implement the WebServiceMock interface  and specify a fake response that the Apex runtime should send  Here are the steps in more detail     First  implement the WebServiceMock interface and specify the fake response in the doInvoke method     global class YourWebServiceMockImpl implements WebServiceMock    global void dolInvoke    Object stub   Object request   Map lt String  Object gt  response   String endpoint   String soapAction   String requestName   String responseNs   String responseName   String responseType          Create respons lement from the autogenerated class       Populate response element       Add response element to the response parameter  as follows   response put  response x   responseElement                om   Note       The class implementing the WebServiceMock interface can be either global or public       You can annotate this class with  isTest since it will be used only in test context  In this way  you can exclude  it from your organization   s code size limit of 3 MB     176    Developer Console Enhancements Apex Code Enhancements    Now that you have specified the values of the fake response  instruct the Apex runtime to s
62. Changed Objects  These objects have changed in API version 26 0       The ChatterActivity object now includes an InfluenceRawRank field  which indicates the Parentld   s Chatter  influence rank  This number is calculated based on the Parentld   s ChatterActivity statistics  relative to the other users  in the organization      The Type field for feed items now includes Pol1Post  which specifies a poll posted on a feed  The Pol1Post type  is available for the following objects  AccountFeed  AssetFeed  CampaignFeed  CaseFeed  CollaborationGroupFeed   ContactFeed  ContractFeed  DashboardFeed  EntitlementFeed  EventFeed  FeedItem  LeadFeed  NewsFeed   OpportunityFeed  Product2Feed  ReportFeed  ServiceContractFeed  SolutionFeed  TaskFeed  UserFeed  and  UserProfileFeed     165    Developer Console Enhancements    Metadata API Enhancements  Updated Metadata    API Enhancements    These metadata fields have been added or changed in Metadata API version 26 0        CustomField displayLocationInDecimal New  DashboardComponent compontentType Changed   an existing field on   Dashboard    Flow  a new field on allowBack New  FlowScreen    Piw  a new field on allowFinish New  FlowScreen     Indicates how the value of a Geolocation    custom field appears in the user interface  If  true  the geolocation appears in decimal  notation  If false  the geolocation appears  as degrees  minutes  and seconds     Now has the following new valid values   e Scatter    e ScatterGrouped    Use these valu
63. Check Spelling     Cancel Forgotten Password manam  Frozen on Startup r  Case Owner Admin User Startup Guide    on Geoff Minor a  g How to Receive Five Stars a   z    Account Global Media    Start Your Project  Name  Status   New      Priority High    Case Origin Web    Se a Star    Description    Genre None       Save Save  amp  Close Save  amp  New  Check Spelling Cancel                Using data category mapping  select which case fields map to which data category groups and set a default data category for  cases that have no value for the mapped fields  For example  you can map a products custom case field with a products data  category group to filter the articles for the customer s products     1  Go to Your Name  gt  Setup  gt  Customize  gt  Knowledge  gt  Data Category Mappings        Case to Data Category Mapping  beta          Define which case fields map to which data category groups and set a default data category for  cases that have no value for the mapped fields  For example  you can map a products custom  case field with a products data category group to filter the articles for the customer s products     Action Case Field Data Category Group Default Data Category  Remove Products Products All  Add         None     bd l   None         None                P    In the Case Field column  use the drop down list to add a field  contact  organization  etc       w    Inthe Data Category Group column  use the drop down list to map the information from the lookup fiel
64. D amp B Companies D amp B Companies Administrator Features and Enhancements    Implementing D amp B Companies  Data com available in  Contact Manager  Developer  Enterprise  Group  and Professional Editions  Data com available for an additional cost in  Unlimited Edition    Data com Clean available in  Developer  Enterprise  and Professional Editions    Data com Clean available for an additional cost in  Unlimited Edition       To implement D amp B Companies     Customize Application       If your organization has purchased Data com Premium  you have access to the D amp B Companies object  which provides D amp B  data for accounts and leads you add to Salesforce  Cleaning an account or lead record also creates a D amp B Company record if  you don   t yet have one in Salesforce     The D amp B Companies tab lists all the D amp B Company records you have in Salesforce     Each D amp B Company record displays a large set of D amp B fields  If you ve purchased the Data com Clean product  you can  also use automated jobs to clean D amp B Company records  Cleaning a D amp B Company record automatically fills blank fields  and overwrites old data with new     Setting up D amp B Companies is easy to do   just follow the steps for configuring Data com Premium  and keep these guidelines  in mind     s gt   Tip  To find out which Data com product your organization has  just click Your Name  gt  Setup  gt  Data com  a Administration  gt  Licenses  amp  Limits  On the Licenses  amp  Limit
65. Enhancement    What I Follow    This feed was previously called My Chatter and displays everything you follow  including posts from people you follow   groups you are a member of  and files and records you re following  Use the drop down list at the top of your feed to  further narrow the subset of posts     To Me  This feed was previously called  Me and displays posts others make to your profile feed and posts where you have been    mentioned     Bookmarked  We didn   t rename this feed  It displays your bookmarked posts in your feed     All Company  This feed was previously called All Chatter and displays all posts and comments from your entire company     We ve also renamed Chatter to Feed or removed the word Chatter in other places throughout the application to match the  new navigation  For example  the Show Chatter and Hide Chatter links on the Home tab now say Show Feed and Hide Feed   respectively     Chatter Influence Calculation Enhancement    Chatter activity statistics include how many posts and comments you ve made  how many comments you ve received  and how  many people liked your posts and comments  Chatter influence shows how your activity stacks up to other people   s  Because  influence is a relative calculation  users in some organizations might become top influencers very quickly without much activity   Other organizations might feel that too many of their users are top influencers  Winter    13 introduces the ability to customize  Chatter activity thresho
66. However  you can   t set a site map link as a  custom root node in a breadcrumb     Cascading Editability    Available for purchase in  Enterprise and Unlimited Editions    Available  with limitations  in  Developer Edition       Previously  when you made a page element in a page template editable  it was editable only in pages or templates based directly  on that template  With Winter 13  we   ve removed that restriction        When you enable the Editable property of a page element  any pages or child templates based on the template also inherit  the enabled status  In turn  the enabled status in the child template cascades to any of i  s children  and so on  If you don   t want  its editability to cascade to any lower levels  disable the Editable property of a page element in a child template        Default Content in Editable Page Elements    Available for purchase in  Enterprise and Unlimited Editions    Available  with limitations  in  Developer Edition       With Winter    13  content added to an editable area on a page template becomes default content for the area in derived pages  and templates     The content of all editable page elements on a child page or template is linked to the content of the editable elements on its  parent page template  When you update the content of an editable page element on the parent template  the changes are  pushed down to any child pages or page templates  However  if you modify the content of an editable page element at the  child p
67. Lite is enabled for an    organization  and so on     SecuritySettings Changed Represents an organization   s security settings   Security settings define trusted IP ranges for  network access  password and login  requirements  and session expiration and  security settings     In version 26 0  this type is supported by the  deploy   and update    calls  in addition  to the retrieve functionality available in version  25 0     In order to add an IP range  you need to  deploy all existing IP ranges  as well as the  one you want to add  Otherwise  the existing  IP ranges are replaced with the ones you  deploy  To remove all the IP ranges in an  organization  leave the networkAccess field  blank   lt networkAccess gt  lt  networkAccess gt       PermissionSet tabSettings Indicates the tab visibility settings for the    permission set  The fields are     e tab   tThe tab name    visibility   The visibility settings for  the tab      Available   tThe tab is available on  the All Tabs page  Individual users can  customize their display to make the  tab visible in any app   None   The tab isn   t available on the  All Tabs page or visible in any apps   Visible   tThe tab is available on the  All Tabs page and appears in the  visible tabs for its associated app   Individual users can customize their  display to hide the tab or make it  visible in other apps        168    Developer Console Enhancements Apex Code Enhancements    Apex Code Enhancements    Apex includes the following enhan
68. Optionally  only send a mock response for a specific endpoint     and method   System assertEquals  http   api salesforce com foo bar   req getEndpoint      System assertEquals  GET   req getMethod           Create a fake response  HttpResponse res   new HttpResponse     res setHeader  Content Type    application json     mS   Ser oclhy  VY   VitooW a Moe    V9  res setStatusCode  200      Ceturn Les        puolre Class CallovcClass 1  public static HttpResponse getInfoFromExternalService        172    Developer Console Enhancements Apex Code Enhancements    HttpRequest req   new HttpRequest      req setEndpoint   http   api salesforce com foo bar     req setMethod  GET      Http h   new Http      HttpResponse res   h send req     Telwen Tes         isTest  private class CalloutClassTest     isTest static void testCallout         Set mock callout class  Test setMock  HttpCalloutMock class  new MockHttpResponseGenerator              Call method to test       This causes a fake response to be sent      from the class that implements HttpCalloutMock   HttpResponse res   CalloutClass getInfoFromExternalService                 Verify response received contains fake values          String contentType   res getHeader  Content Type     System assert contentType        application json     String actualValue   res getBody      String expectedValue      foo   bar        System assertEquals actualValue  expectedValue     System assertEquals 200  res getStatusCode        Testing HTTP Cal
69. Professional Editions    Data com Clean available for an additional cost in  Unlimited Edition    To clean account records     Edit    on accounts  To clean contact records     Edit    on contacts    To clean lead records     Edit    on leads       Use Data com Clean to make sure your CRM records are always up to date     Clean works for a  the account  contact  and lead records you have access to in Salesforce   not just those you previously added  from Data com     If your organization uses Data com Premium and you clean an account or lead record that doesn   t yet have a D amp B Company  record linked to it  Salesforce will create one if it   s available in Data com and link the two records  You ll also see a D amp B  Company Record Linked field on the comparison page when you clean the account or lead     Note  If you clean your account records with the Data com Corporate or Premium product or Data com Clean   Data com converts non USD currencies to USD every month  which may cause the values in this field to change    k For organizations that use non USD currencies  we ignore the Annual Revenue field when determining a record   s  clean status  so the Clean Status field   s value does not change   We also remove the value from the Annual  Revenue field on account records and the clean comparison page     1  Check the record   s Clean Status field     If the status is Different or Not Compared  click Clean to open the comparison page and compare the Salesforce  record wit
70. TP callout to one of the endpoints  http   api salesforce com foo bar or http   api salesforce com foo sfde  the callout is not made and  the Apex runtime sends the corresponding mock response you specified in your instance of  MultiStaticResourceCalloutMock     This is a full example containing the test method  testCalloutWithMultipleStaticResources  and the method it is  testing  get InfoFromExternalService  that performs the callout  Before running this example  create a static resource  named mockResponse based on a text file with the content   hah   fooled you   and another named  mockResponse2 based on a text file with the content   hah   fooled you twice    Save each class separately and  run the test in CalloutMultiStaticClassTest        public class CalloutMultiStaticClass    public static HttpResponse getInfoFromExternalService String endpoint      HttpRequest req   new HttpRequest     req setEndpoint  endpoint     req setMethod  GET     Http h   new Http     HttpResponse res   h send req    return res            isTest  private class CalloutMultiStaticClassTest     isTest static void testCalloutWithMultipleStaticResources         Use MultiStaticResourceCalloutMock to     specify fake response for a certain endpoint and     include response body in a static resource   MultiStaticResourceCalloutMock multimock   new MultiStaticResourceCalloutMock      multimock setStaticResource     http   api salesforce com foo bar    mockResponse      multimock setStaticResource    
71. The rich media content is provided by Embed ly   a third party service     We don   t share any content  user  organization  or account data with Embed ly  We only share the URLs that are on the  domain whitelist  which currently includes the YouTube  Vimeo  Mashable  Techcrunch  NYTimes  ReadWriteWeb  and  SoundCloud domains  All of our URL requests pass through a Salesforce proxy  meaning Embed ly never receives calls directly  from the client and therefore doesn   t have information about who s making the URL request     Rich media previews are enabled by default  If you disable rich media previews  users can only preview videos from the YouTube  community     31    Additional Chatter Enhancements Chatter Messenger Enhancements    Enabling and Disabling Rich Media Previews    Rich media previews in links are enabled by default     Click Your Name  gt  Setup    Under App Setup  click Customize  gt  Chatter  gt  Settings   Click Edit    Select Allow Rich Link Previews    Click Save     Do n  A    Ifa post doesn   t render a link as a rich preview in the feed  the URL domain for that link either isn   t supported or Embed ly  was unable to return the preview content for the URL     ADDITIONAL CHATTER ENHANCEMENTS    Chatter Messenger Enhancements    Chatter Messenger now includes limited chat history  When you start a chat with someone  your conversations with them  from the last 72 hours are automatically shown  To see a list of all conversations from the last 72 hours     1
72. Triggers page includes a fraction  between parentheses with the numbers used to compute this percentage  for example  90   72 80   The code coverage  percentage is calculated by dividing the number of lines covered by tests by the total number of lines that are part of the coverage  calculation  Some lines of code are excluded from code coverage calculation  such as     Comments  System debug statements    Test methods  e A code statement that is broken up into multiple lines   only the first line is counted    To generate code coverage results  you must run your Apex tests first  If no tests have been run  no code coverage data will  exist and 0   No coverage data  displays for classes  except for test classes  and triggers on the Apex Classes and Apex Triggers  pages     Creating sObjects with Default Values Using the newSObject Method    Using the newSObject method on the sObject token  of type Schema  sObjectType   you can now create new sObjects  with custom fields prepopulated with default values that have been predefined in your organization  You can also specify the  record type of the sObject to create  This is useful when default values vary for different record types  like for picklist and  multi select picklist custom fields  To learn more about default field values  see    About Default Field Values    in the Salesforce  online help     185    Developer Console Enhancements Apex Code Enhancements    newSObject ID recordTypeId sObject Constructs a new sObject of t
73. When you open a debug log in the Developer Console  it opens in a System Log view which is a collection of panels for  analyzing the log  In the Winter    13 release  you can create perspectives in a System Log view  A perspective is a layout of  panels  Create perspectives to organize and simplify System Log views to match the way you work  Switch between perspectives  as you change tasks  For example  you might have one perspective for analyzing performance and another perspective for  all purpose debugging     Creating Perspectives in a System Log View    A perspective is a layout of panels in a System Log view in the Developer Console     The default perspective is    All     which displays every panel  Most tasks you perform in a System Log view don   t require you  to use every panel  When you perform a task in a System Log view  use a perspective that makes completing the task fast and  easy  Every developer has a different style  but the following is a list of perspectives you could create to perform common tasks          Log Only      Contains the Execution Log panel  An all purpose perspective for viewing log execution        Performance      Contains the Stack Tree panel and the Execution Overview panel  Use this perspective to test performance        Limits      Contains the Execution Overview panel  Use this perspective to check governor limits     a gt   Tip  Ifyou create a perspective that includes the Execution Log  you may want to include the Source panel  Us
74. You can create a maximum of 50 custom fields     Note  If you delete a custom field  filters that use the custom field are also deleted  and the result of assignment  or escalation rules that rely on the custom field   s data might change       Define and activate validation rules that opportunity team data must meet before a user can save the record      Define and activate Apex code that executes before or after specific data manipulation language  DML  events occur  such  as before opportunity team records are inserted into the database  or after records have been deleted      Define opportunity team roles for your organization       Optionally  replace existing team roles     You can globally replace an existing value in a picklist with a new value that you ve first created using the picklist edit page   Replacing an existing team role affects opportunity team and account team members       Adda custom button or link to the opportunity team      Customize the Opportunity Team Member page layout and specify which fields will appear on the Opportunity Team  Member multi line page  You can add custom fields  buttons and links  and customizable related lists to a page layout      Edit the Opportunity Team related list properties on each page layout containing the Opportunity Team related list  You  can add custom fields and buttons to the related list  To display opportunity team information in a related list on a parent  page  you must create a link between the opportunity t
75. You can either flag differences only  or flag  them and auto fill with Data com data     110    Data com Clean Data com Clean Administrator Features and Enhancements      We ve updated the Data com Reports AppExchange package to include a preconfigured validation rule that lets you exclude  individual account  contact  and lead records from being cleaned with automated clean jobs  The rule works for organizations  that use Data com Premium and the Data com Clean product  which provides automated jobs      Ifyou   ve purchased the Data com Clean product  you ll find that we   ve automatically enabled it for you  The Data com  Clean product offers automated Clean jobs      Ifyou use Data com Corporate or Data com Premium  you ll find that we   ve enabled Data com Clean for you  With  Corporate or Premium  your users can manually clean account  contact  and lead records     Defining Your Data com Clean Job Preferences  Data com Clean Only     Data com available in  Contact Manager  Developer  Enterprise  Group  and Professional Editions    Data com available for an additional cost in  Unlimited Edition    Data com Clean available in  Developer  Enterprise  and Professional Editions    Data com Clean available for an additional cost in  Unlimited Edition       To define Data com Clean Preferences     Customize Application       Clean preferences let you specify       Which objects    records to clean with automated jobs      How you want to clean them  Jobs can either       Flag 
76. a Chatter Answers community     The Domain object represents a custom web address assigned to a site in your organization      The DomainSite object is a junction object between the Domain and Site objects      The EventRelation object replaces the EventAttendee object  See Event and EventAttendee Object Changes     It includes several fields for Shared Activities  IsParent  IsWhat  IsInvitee  AccountId        The Relationtd field contains the ID of the person or resource invited to the event       The IdeaTheme object represents an invitation to community members to submit ideas that are focused on a specific  topic       These objects are part of the Salesforce Communities pilot program     O The Network object represents a community   0 The NetworkMember object represents a member of a community     O The NetworkProfile object represents a profile in a community     These objects are part of the User Sharing pilot program     O The UserShare object represents a sharing entry on a user record        The UserMembershipSharingRule object represents the rules for sharing user records from a source group to a  target group       The following objects are new and available to organizations that use Collaborative Forecasts  Forecasts  originally  released in Winter    12       ForecastingAdjustment  This object represents an individual user   s adjustment for a subordinate   s forecast via a  ForecastingItem  Available in API versions 26 0 and greater       ForecastingFact  This 
77. a team of users  called an opportunity team  to share and work on an opportunity together     Note  Previously  opportunity teams were called sales teams  If your organization had enabled sales teams prior to  Winter    13  opportunity team selling will be automatically enabled in Winter    13     As an administrator  you can customize opportunity team roles for your organization  such as Account Executive or Sales  Representative  Then  your users can add members to an opportunity team on a particular opportunity  and assign each member  a team role for that opportunity     43    Opportunity Teams Enhancements Customizing Opportunity Teams    In Winter 13  opportunity teams have been expanded to allow greater customization and control  You can define opportunity  team layout pages and add custom fields  custom buttons and links  and related lists to them  You can define validation rules  and triggers to verify and automate team selling and opportunity team changes  And you can create custom report types for  opportunity teams     When team selling is enabled  you can customize opportunity teams for your organization       Enable team selling and select which existing page layouts will include the Opportunity Team related list  To change the  location of the related list on a particular page  customize the page layout      Create a custom field for the opportunity team  Custom fields appear on the Opportunity Team Member page and can  be included in opportunity team reports  
78. address key    archetype    integration scenarios     A selection matrix to help you determine which pattern best fits your scenario     Integration tips and best practices    This document is for designers and architects who need to integrate the Force com platform with their on premises  applications  This content is a distillation of many successful implementations by salesforce com architects and partners     Ifimplemented properly  these patterns enable you to get to production as fast as possible and have the most stable  scalable   and maintenance free set of applications possible  Salesforce com   s own consulting architects use these patterns as reference  points during architectural reviews and are actively engaged in maintaining and improving them       Force com REST API Developer s Guide   New information on authentication has been added in the    Understanding  Authentication    section  The organization of the guide   s    Reference    and    Using Rest Resources    sections has been  improved     214    Help and Training Enhancements    Workbooks      Service Cloud Workbook  PDF   Gives you an introduction to creating a unified help desk for your support team      Site com Workbook  HTML PDF   Introduces you to Site com and shows you how to create a simple website using Site com  Studio      Analytics Workbook  HTML PDF   Updated to cover new reporting and dashboard features such as joined reports  buckets   cross filters  and dashboard filters     Help and Tr
79. ade to the workflow evaluation  Usability Enhancements criteria area of the user interface and documentation  based on early    customer feedback     October 3  2012 Chatter Enhancements Updated Chatter Reporting to    Not automatically visible  Feature  is available but requires some setup     because it requires a new  custom report type     October 3  2012 New Behavior for Customer Portal Updated the title and information to accurately reflect email  Email Notifications When No notification behavior when the Change Owner to Portal  Change Owner to Portal User User Template isn   t set for a portal   Template is Selected and New  Behavior for Partner Portal Email  Notifications When No Change  Owner to Portal User  Template is Selected    October 3  2012 Search by D U N S Number Added entry to the Data com user enhancements section indicating  you can search Salesforce by D U N S Number    September 26  Work com in Chatter   Pilot Added a section on Work com features    2012   September 21  Help and Training Enhancements Added the new Service Cloud Workbook and updated Analytics   2012 Workbook to the Help and Training section    September 21  Opportunity Team Known Added a known limitation about renaming tabs and labels for an   2012 Limitations opportunity team member    September 21  Help and Training Enhancements Added the Help and Training section  which lists videos and   2012 documents that are new or updated for Winter    13    September 21  Chatter Desktop Enhancem
80. ads that will be  converted to person accounts from those that will be converted to business accounts  In particular   remove the Company field from the page layouts of leads that will be converted to person accounts   and make the Company field required on the page layouts of leads that will be converted to business  accounts     If you create a lead  convert it  and then attach it to a person account owned by someone else  the  person account owner becomes the contact owner     If you convert a lead owned by someone else and attach it to a person account that you own  the lead  owner becomes the contact owner     122    D amp B Companies D amp B Companies User Features and Enhancements    Record Types If the lead has a record type  the default record type of the user converting the lead is assigned to  records created during lead conversion     The default record type of the user converting the lead determines the lead source values available  during conversion  If the desired lead source values are not available  add the values to the default  record type of the user converting the lead     Salesforce to When you convert a lead  Salesforce to Salesforce inactivates the shared record and updates the   Salesforce External Sharing related list in your connection s lead record with an Inactive  converted  status  Due  to inactivation of the shared record  changes to the Lead Status during conversion aren t reflected in  your connection s lead record     Standard and Custom The
81. age or template level  you break the link between the elements  and any subsequent changes made to the page element  on the parent template won t trickle down to its children     Break the link between parent and child editable elements by selecting the child element on the page or in the Page Structure  pane and clicking     gt  Override Parent Content     128    Site com Improved Linking in Data Elements    You can return control of the editable page element to the parent template by selecting the child element on the page or in    the Page Structure pane and clicking     gt  Revert to Parent Content  When you do this  any custom content in the child  editable page element is lost        Disabling the Editable property of a panel in a parent template overrides any changes made to that panel in child pages or  templates  Changes to the panel at the child level disappear  and the panel reflects only the content from the parent template   However  the changes at the child level aren   t lost  Re enabling the Editable property of the panel in the parent template  restores the custom content previously added to its children        Improved Linking in Data Elements    Available for purchase in  Enterprise and Unlimited Editions    Available  with limitations  in  Developer Edition       When using data elements  previously called    repeater elements      you can now more easily create hyperlinks to custom URLs   to items in your site  and to emails  The new link type options mat
82. ages  Available request binding types are HTTP POST and HTTP Redirect  Make your selection from the Single  Sign On Settings page at Your Name  gt  Setup  gt  Security Controls  gt  Single Sign On Settings  and with SAML  Enabled checked  click Edit  The default setting is HTTP POST     New getAccessTokenMap Method    The Auth  AuthToken Apex class has a new method to retrieve access tokens  getAccessTokenMap  Use this method  if the user ID is mapped to multiple third party users  getAccessTokenMap returns a map of access tokens for each  third party user  For Apex information  refer to the Force com Apex Code Developers Guide     147    Developer Console Enhancements Tests Tool    DEVELOPER CONSOLE ENHANCEMENTS    Tests Tool    The Winter    13 release adds a Tests tool to the Developer Console  Use the Tests tool to run Apex unit tests on the server  and check your code coverage  Now you can edit  debug  and test your applications without leaving the Developer Console     Creating and Running Test Runs    A test run is a collection of classes that contain test methods  Run a test run to execute the test methods in the classes     1  In the Developer Console  click the Tests tab   2  Click New Run   Classes with test methods are listed in the Select Tests window     Select Tests x  Test Classes Selected Test Classes  Name Name  HelloWorldTest  TestStripe   gt    lt   Filter test classes Select All Run    3  To filter classes  type in the Filter box     4  Select classes and
83. ages won t be impacted     213    Help and Training Enhancements    Help and Training Enhancements    Videos      Who Sees What  This video series explains how you can control access and visibility to your organization   s data     Overview   Organization Access   Object Access   Organization Wide Defaults   Record Access via the Role Hierarchy  Sharing Rules   Field level security    c o gt  oS oS oS oo      Letting Your Salesforce Administrator Access Your Account  1 42 minutes     Making Your Reports Run Faster  3 13 minutes     Removing Users    Access to Salesforce  3 45 minutes   Building a Simple Flow  3 29 minutes     Getting the Most out of Chatter Feeds  2 31 minutes     Entitlements Management Setup  2 46 minutes     Idea Themes  3 30 minutes     Tip Sheets and Implementation Guides      Service Cloud Console Implementation Guide   Planning questions and implementation tips to get the most from Service  Cloud Console apps     Developer Guides      Integration Patterns and Practices   When you implement Salesforce  you frequently need to integrate it with other  applications  Although each integration scenario is unique  there are common requirements and issues that developers  must resolve     This document describes strategies  in the form of patterns  for these common integration scenarios  Each pattern describes  the design and approach for a particular scenario rather than a specific implementation  In this document you ll find        A number of patterns that 
84. ail Drafts    in  the online help     To learn more about approval processes for email messages  see   Creating Approval Processes for Email Drafts    in the online  help     Case Feed Enhancements Support for Chatter Answers in Case Feed    Enabling Email Drafts in Case Feed    Available in  Enterprise  Unlimited  and Developer Editions    To change support settings     Manage Cases       AND       Customize Application       Before enabling draft emails  set up Email to Case and Case Feed     Enabling draft emails gives support agents who use Case Feed the ability to write and save messages without having to send  them immediately  This option also makes it possible to implement approval processes so messages can be reviewed by  supervisors or senior agents before they   re sent to customers     1  Click Your Name  gt  Setup  gt  Customize  gt  Cases  gt  Support Settings   2  Click Edit    3  Select Enable Email Drafts    4  Click Save           am   Note  Changes to fields other than To  From  CC  BCC  and Subject in the Email publisher aren   t saved when a    messages is saved as a draft  We recommend removing any additional fields from the Email publisher if you plan to     use draft emails     Support for Chatter Answers in Case Feed    Available in  Enterprise  Unlimited  and Developer Editions    In organizations with Chatter Answers enabled  support agents can now use the Portal publisher in Case Feed to post replies  to cases that have been escalated from question
85. aining Portal Enhancements      You can now access the Salesforce Help and Training portal without having to log in  http   help salesforce com      Sandbox and Developer Edition organizations have been upgraded to use the public Help and Training portal  To contact  Support  view your cases  or launch premier training courses  log in to your production organization  The login button is  located in the upper right hand corner of the help portal      The Help and Training portal provides a rich set of new resources and improvements  including an updated look and a  more intelligent knowledge base to get you to the right answers faster  To view it  click Help  amp  Training within Salesforce      Access to the new Help and Training portal was previously limited to English  French  German  Italian  Japanese  and  Spanish users  The new help portal is now also available to users in these languages     Chinese Simplified  Chinese Traditional  Danish   Dutch   Finnish   Korean   Portuguese   Russian   Swedish   Thai      D O a G O a G O      Ifyour help search results include Salesforce videos hosted on YouTube  a separate tab displays them for your convenience      The case collaboration feature allows you to add up to 20 individuals from your organization to a case you file with  salesforce com Support to keep them up to date on the status of the case  You and case collaborators can reply to the email  to add comments to the case      The Help and Training portal includes a new Q
86. all fields in a Salesforce record whose values are different from those in the matched Data com record  or    Flag fields with different values and a so auto fill blank fields    You can set flag only or flag and auto fill preferences for entire records or field by field  If you use Data com Premium  you  can also clean D amp B Company records that are linked to accounts and leads  D amp B Company clean jobs automatically fill or  overwrite field values on D amp B company records  but do not change data on linked account or lead records     Your preferences take effect when the next scheduled clean job runs  and users will see the flags  as appropriate  when they  clean records manually          Note  Converted leads are excluded from Leads clean jobs        1  Click Your Name  gt  Setup  gt  Data comAdministration  gt  Clean  gt  Preferences   2  Select the Enable Clean jobs checkbox for each object whose records you want to clean   If you clear the Enable Clean  jobs checkbox  automated jobs will not run for objects of that type      3  For each object you ve enabled  select your clean preference       Flag all differences per record to only identify fields whose values are different from Data com values    111    Data com Clean Data com Clean Administrator Features and Enhancements      Flag differences and auto fill blank fields to identify fields whose values are different and fiX blank  fields with values from Data com     e Customize settings field by field     4  Ifyo
87. alueOf to perform the String conversion of its  object argument  If the argument to convert is a built in type with a toString method  or a user defined type with an  overridden toString method  the toString method is called  Otherwise  System  debug and String  valueOf compute    183    Developer Console Enhancements Apex Code Enhancements    a String representation of the argument  Previously  System  debug and String  valueOf always wrote or returned the  argument   s String representation and didn   t call toString  even when available on the argument object     This example illustrates the new behavior of System  debug  It calls String valueOf and System  debug on a type   which invokes the Type toString method     Type t   List lt Integer gt  class        Converts to String using the Type toString method  String s   String valueOf  t       Returns  LIST lt Integer gt       It used to return  Type   aot LIST lt Integer gt    System assertEquals  LIST lt Integer gt     s               System debug use the Type toString method  II to Comvert the yoe to    a Seimo      Writes LIST lt Integer gt  to the debug output  System debug  t            This example shows how the overridden toString method of a user defined class gets invoked by String valueOf and  System  debug  The class with the overridden toString method is listed first  followed by a code snippet that calls  String valueOf and System  debug     public class PairNumbers    Integer x y     public PairNumbers  Integ
88. ancements       eessessesseesseeseesseesseeseesseesseessesseesseesseesseeseesseesseeseeeseesseessesseeeseesse 214    About the Release Notes    About the Release Notes    The Release Notes are a comprehensive user guide for the latest release of Salesforce  Unlike a traditional release notes document  that includes only a simple list of enhancements  the Salesforce Release Notes give you everything you need to get up and  running with the new features and enhancements in the latest release     What   s Included in the Release Notes    For every new major enhancement  the Release Notes provide     A brief  high level description of the functionality    Implementation tips to help you get started with setup and administration    Best practices to help you maximize the benefit      Complete end to end instructions    Beyond the major new features  the Additional Enhancements sections include a list and brief description of every other  enhancement or functional change included in the latest release   everything from email  to new report types  to security and  packaging     Let the Release Notes be your guide to success with the latest release from salesforce com     Your Feedback Matters    We know how important the Release Notes  online help  and documentation are to your company s success with Salesforce   To continually improve the content we deliver to you  we want to know what works and what doesn t  Let us know       Feedback forms   Every HTML documentation page  both in
89. ancements Visualforce Charting   Generally Available       Id actualTemplateId   chooser getDefaultEmailTemplatelId c Id    EmailTemplate expectedTemplate      SELECT id FROM EmailTemplate WHERE DeveloperName    LX1150 template     Id expectedTemplateId   expectedTemplate Id   System assertEquals actualTemplatelId  expectedTemplateld                Change the case properties to match a different templat  c Subject    My LX1220 is overheating    Database update c                   Make sure the correct template is chosen in this case  actualTemplateId   chooser getDefaultEmailTemplatelId c Id    xpectedTemplate     SELECT id FROM EmailTemplate WHERE DeveloperName    LX1220 template     xpectedTemplateId   expectedTemplate Id   System assertEquals actualTemplatelId  expectedTemplateld                            Parameterized Interfaces No Longer Supported    Parameterized interfaces are not supported in Apex saved using Salesforce com API version 26 0 and later     Visualforce Charting   Generally Available    Available in  Group  Professional  Enterprise  Unlimited  and Developer Editions    Custom controllers and standard controller extensions are not supported in Group or Professional Editions     To create  edit  and set version settings for Visualforce pages     Customize Application       To edit custom Visualforce controllers or Apex     Author Apex          Visualforce charting is now Generally Available  In addition to being available to all Visualforce customers  char
90. and lead details in the new Salesforce Side Panel  This  side panel displays up to a total of four contacts and leads from the From  To  and Cc fields in your users    emails     In addition  your users can       See up to a total of four open and past activities and opportunities related to the contacts and leads that appear in the side  panel       Manually add emails to either one contact and one account or opportunity  or one lead only     48    Salesforce for Outlook Enhancements Viewing Your Salesforce World in Microsoft   Outlook     Beta      See whether Salesforce encounters duplicate contacts or leads  and choose the most appropriate ones to display in the side  panel     Search for additional contacts  leads  accounts  and opportunities       Use the blue text links to view details directly in Salesforce                                                           3 9    Inbox   Microsoft Outlook ofS  File Home   Send Receive Folder View Add Ins a Q  i     fad Shlgnore x AO e E Meeting  Aj Move to     2 To Manager  Aj Move        3yUnread Read Find a Contact    4 X5 Clean Up   e a v  33 Team E mail oa Done GBrules    Fe Categorize     Gy Address Book  New New Delete   Reply Reply Forward    E mail Rems     Junk  gt  asia By Morey  G  Reply Delete 5 Create New     Qllonenote W Followup   Y Filter E mail    New Delete Respond Quick Steps a Move Tags Find  P p  4 christina_will expressiandt com Search Inbox  Ctri E   Inbox       Arrange By  Date Newest on top  QA Drafts 
91. appears     2  Hover over     to display Chatter options and make a selection     Forecasts Enhancements Create Forecasting Custom Report Types    Create Forecasting Custom Report Types    Available in  Professional  Enterprise  Unlimited  and Developer Editions    To create or update custom report types     Manage Custom Report Types       To delete custom report types     Modify All Data              Note  This information applies to the Forecasts product beginning with the Winter    12 release and not to Customizable  Forecasts  You must enable Forecasts to create a forecasting custom report type     et     i You asked for it  These enhancements are from the IdeaExchange  Forecast Quota Reporting  Improved Forecasts  Reports  and Reporting on All Objects     Administrators can now create forecasting custom report types for their users with Analytics for Collaborative Forecasts  A  report type defines the set of records and fields available to a report based on the relationships between a primary object and  its related objects  Reports display only records that meet the criteria defined in the report type  Use this table to understand  the report types that you can create for users        Forecasting Items Viewing information about forecasting line items  including adjustment amount information     As a best practice  use all default fields in the report type  including the following       Owner Only Amount   The sum of all of a person   s opportunities  without adjustment
92. are going well     February 24  2012   Best Answer 0    8    John Cirrus t X  We are glad that you are not seeing any issues with IE8  We will be  Supporting IES once we go through our Winter Release    February 24  2012     BestAnswer gO  amp        86    Additional Service Enhancements New Limits for Chatter Answers Questions and Replies    New Limits for Chatter Answers Questions and Replies    Available in  Enterprise and Unlimited Editions    In Winter    13  the maximum number of characters users can type in questions and replies has increased  When you select the  Optimize Question Flow permission on the Chatter Answers Settings page  questions can be up to 32 000 characters in  length  Public replies also increase to 32 000 characters and private replies increase to 4 000 characters  Without Optimize  Question Flow enabled  questions and all replies can be up to 1 000 characters in length     New Behavior for Customer Portal Email Notifications  When No Change Owner to Portal User  Template is Selected    In Winter 13  we ve improved the behavior of change owner email notifications sent from portals that don   t have Change  Owner to Portal User Template ora default template set  When a portal user changes the owner of a record to another  portal user whose profile is associated with multiple portals  the email notification sent to the user includes a link to the portal  in which the change of ownership occurred  In previous releases  the link pointed to the oldest lo
93. as been freezing after she downloads movies      Jrrower customer Log a Call Write Case Note Change Status More    E  E  S o      Email   EJ Select a Template Reopen Case X  From    support ww com   lt support ww com gt  v W Following  To   cwhite globalmedia com gq Followers Show Al 1   adic    g A  Bee   E  amp   Custom Links  Subject   RE  Unit freezes after downloads Google          Write an email to the customer       Attach File Send Email    ances  3     All Updates  v u Sort by  Post Date v  V AllUpdates s    Emails d an article to this case     Status Changes  hY IS my VX6 freezing   t   Like   July 11  2012 at 10 46 AM    Call Logs a  Case Notes lips    Portal Answers    d Status from Escalated to New     t   Like   March 20  2012 at 4 12 PM  Tasks and Events             For more information  see    Creating and Editing Feed Layouts in Case Feed    in the online help     In addition  you can now rename the Case Feed publishers and feed filters so they match the terms your company uses  For  example  if your company refers to customers as guests  you might rename the Answer Customer publisher    Answer Guest        For more information  see    Renaming Publishers and Feed Filters in Case Feed    in the online help     Custom Publishers in Case Feed    Available in  Enterprise  Unlimited  and Developer Editions    Publishers in Case Feed let support agents perform tasks like emailing customers  writing case notes  and changing the status  of a case  Using Visualforce 
94. asily remember it     Default Keyboard Shortcuts for a Service Cloud Console    Available in  Enterprise  Unlimited  and Developer Editions with the Service Cloud    After an administrator enables keyboard shortcuts for a Service Cloud console  the following shortcuts display automatically  and are available for customizing        Focus keyboard shortcuts on Activates keyboard shortcuts in a browser displaying a Service ESC    the console Cloud console    Go to the navigation tab Selects the navigation tab  V   Go to tab details Selects details on a tab  SHIFT S  Go to the primary tabs Selects the row of primary tabs  P   Go to the subtabs Selects the row of subtabs on a primary tab  S   Go to list view Selects the list view  N    78    Service Cloud Console Automatically Saved User Sessions for the Service Cloud Console    Go to the first list view item Selects the first item on the list view  SHIFT F   Go to header search box Moves the cursor to the header search box  R   Move left Moves the cursor left  LEFT ARROW  Move right Moves the cursor right  RIGHT ARROW  Move up Moves the cursor up  UP ARROW  Move down Moves the cursor down  DOWN ARROW       Open drop down button on Opens the drop down button on tabs to select more actions  D  tabs    Open tab Opens a new tab     Close tab Closes a selected tab   Enter Activates a command     Edit Switch from detail to edit page        Automatically Saved User Sessions for the Service Cloud  Console    Available in  Enterprise  Unl
95. ast  three email notifications over 30 days  To keep a sandbox active and avoid email notifications  log in periodically     Full Sandbox Configuration    Available in  Enterprise  Unlimited  and Database com Editions    In Winter    13  new settings encourage you to further reduce the amount of data you copy when creating or refreshing a full  sandbox  Using the minimum selections speeds up your sandbox copy       The Opportunity History option allows you to select the number of days of opportunity history from your production  organization to copy to your sandbox  You can copy from 0 to 180 days  in 30 day increments  The default value is 0 days     The default values for the Object History and Case History options are changed from 30 days to 0 days     Updates to Platform Portal User Licenses    The Platform Portal User Licenses table has been updated to reflect the current permissions that can be given to a Platform  portal user     Users with this license have read and create access on ideas and questions and answers  and read only access to documents   knowledge  price books  and products     This table lists the permissions that can be given to Platform portal users        Documents  Ideas  Knowledge  Price Books    212    Additional Force com Enhancements Portal Users Not in Developer and Configuration Sandboxes    Products    Questions and Answers       Portal Users Not in Developer and Configuration  Sandboxes    Available in  Enterprise  Unlimited  and Database com
96. at implements it     global interface Vehicle    Long getMaxSpeed     String getType          public class Car implements Vehicle       Implement global interface methods in public  Vi methods   public Long getMaxSpeed     return 100     public String getType     return  Sedan        This second example shows that global methods can be overridden as public methods in the class extension  The base class is  listed first  followed by the class that extends it     global virtual class MyBaseClass    global virtual String getMessage      return  Hello from MyClass            public class MyExtension extends MyBaseClass       Override the getMessage   method from MyBaseClass  public override String getMessage      return  Overriding the returned message            New Type  toString Method    The toString method has been added to the Type class  This method returns the type name as a String  Other Apex  methods  such as String  valueOf and System  debug  call this method to convert their Type argument into a String     This example calls toString on the Type corresponding to a list of Integers     Type t   List lt Integer gt  class   Sieiestinvey a   Eo COSTELHA  System assertEquals   LIST lt Integer gt    s      String valueOf and System  debug Use toString for Argument  String Conversion    String valueOf now performs String conversion for its object argument using the toString method on the argument   if available  And the same is true for System  debug since it calls String  v
97. ate based on a case   s origin  subject  or other criteria     Before you can enable default email templates  you need to create text  HTML  or Visualforce templates  and create an Apex  class that contains template selection logic  This class must implement the new Support  EmailTemplateSelector       interface     For more information on enabling and configuring default templates  see    Enabling Default Email Templates in Case Feed     in the online help     Updated Look for Case Feed    The Case Feed page has an updated look  with redesigned buttons and a cleaner  more streamlined feel        Customer    case 00001004 Created Date 11 15 2011 2 03 PM Status New  Carole White i Priority Medium  Unit freezes after downloads    Global Media Case Owner Karen Williams   415  555 1212  Customers VX6 unit has been freezing after she downloads movies   Er  Answer Customer   Email v E9 Select a Template    Reopen Case X  Log a Call  Write an email to the customer  af Following    Write Case Note f7  7  pean Send Email Followers Show All  1   Change Status A    View Case Details   Articles  Custom Links  All Updates for this case Sort by  PostOatey Googie  es A Karen Williams  All Updates attached an article to this case     Li Why is my VX6 freezing     Emails Comment   Like   July 11  2012 at 10 46 AM    Status Changes    Joe Philips  Call Logs changed Status from Escalated to New   Comment   Like   March 20  2012 at 4 12 PM       Case Notes          65    Case Feed Enhancements N
98. ave  A Work com login dialog appears    Enter your Work com username and password  which are separate from your Salesforce credentials  If you haven   t yet  created a Work com account  you can sign up for an account on the Work com login page  After successfully logging into  your Work com account  you ll be asked to approve the connection between Salesforce and Work com     4  Click Approve     wh    To disable Work com features  click Name  gt  Setup  gt  Customize  gt  Work com  gt  Work com Thanks and deselect Enable   Users will no longer see the Thanks action in the Chatter publisher  However  previously created Thanks posts will not be  deleted and might still be visible where they were posted     Creating a Thanks Post in Chatter  If Work com has been enabled for your organization  you ll see a Thanks button in the Chatter publisher  To create a Thanks  post that recognizes a colleague for work well done     1  Click Thanks in the Chatter publisher  A drop down form appears in which you can enter various items needed for the  post     mm    Note  The first time you click Thanks  you ll be required to log in to Work com  Your Work com username and  password are separate from your login credentials for Salesforce  If you don   t have a Work com account  you can  sign up for one from this login screen  After logging in to Work com  you ll be asked to approve the connection  between Salesforce and Work com  Click Approve to complete this process  This enables the Thanks 
99. ble app is enabled for all users in your organization  If you disable this option  users can still  install the app but they   re unable to use it to log in to their Salesforce accounts     3  Use Enable the Salesforce Touch mobile browser app to control access to Salesforce Touch from mobile       browsers    By default  the mobile browser app is disabled for all users in your organization  If you enable this option  users who log  in to Salesforce from the Safari   on iPad web browser are automatically redirected to Salesforce Touch      Note     If users prefer to access the full Salesforce site from Safari instead  they can turn off the mobile browser app  redirection for themselves  either from the app or from the full site by deselecting the Touch User checkbox at  Your Name  gt  Setup  gt  My Personal Information  gt  Personal Information         i    Alternately  you can use the Web Services API to quickly turn automatic redirection to the mobile browser app  off  or on  for users  When the mobile browser version of Salesforce Touch is enabled  the  UserPreferencesOptOutOfTouch field is added to the User object  By default  this field is set to fal se   which  turns on automatic access to the mobile browser app   for all user records  Change this field to true to turn the  redirection off for desired users  See the User section in the Web Services API Developer s Guide for more information     4  Click Save     94    Mobile Salesforce Touch    If you enable both the d
100. bled  this field can also contain the ID of the event s Who or What     Shared Activities for Events The EventRelation object includes the following fields     AccountId is the Account ID of the relation   e IsInvitee indicates whether the relation is an invitee   e IsParent indicates whether the relation is a Who What   e IsWhat indicates whether the relation is the Who or the What       Note  AccountId  IsParent  and IswWhat  are visible when Shared Activities  is enabled  IsInvitee is visible when Shared Activities is enabled  or is in the  process of being enabled or disabled     Child Events You can update only the IsReminderSet and ReminderDateT ime fields of a child event   You can query and delete a child event     You can   t create an EventRelation object for a child event  The Event Id field of an  EventRelation object always points to the master record  An invitee on an event can query  the EventRelation object to view the master record        Adding  Removing  Updating You can add or remove invitees  and update invitee status through the API  To create an  Invitees invitee     e IfShared Activities is not enabled  create an EventRelation object for the invitee      If Shared Activities is being enabled or rolled back  or is enabled  and the invitee is  already a Who  update IsInvitee to true  Ifthe invitee is not already a Who  create  an EventRelation object for the invitee with IsInvitee set to true  IsInvitee is  defaulted to t rue during enablement and rollba
101. callly  It then queries for all sObjects and updates  their owner ID fields to the new owner ID     public class MyDynamicSolution     future  public static void updateOwner  List lt ID gt  objIds  ID newOwnerlId        Validate input       System assert objIds    null    System assert objIds size    gt  0    System assert  newOwnerlId    null         Get the sObject token from the first ID      the List contains IDs of sObjects of the same type    Schema SObjectType token   objIds 0  getSObjectType                Using the token  do a describe      and construct a query dynamically    Schema DescribeSObjectResult dr   token getDescribe      String queryString    SELECT ownerId FROM     dr getName        WHERE      Or  10D  Goje s GCloqlcls              178    Developer Console Enhancements Apex Code Enhancements    GpblereySieresuoe  m  Vic   VY a gt  obie ae Y  OR Ve        Remove the last   OR   queryString   queryString subString 0  queryString length     4      sObject   objDBList   Database query  queryString     System assert  objDBList size    gt  0         Update the owner ID on the sObjects  for Integer i 0 i lt objDBList size   itt       objJDBList i  put  ownerId   newOwnerld        Database SaveResult   srList   Database update objDBList  false    for Database SaveResult sr   srList      iit  Se isSuecess N 1   System debug  Updated owner ID successfully for      dr getName       ID     sr getId              else    System debug  Updating     dr getName       ret
102. cements in Winter  13  For detailed information on these enhancements  refer to the  Force com Apex Code Developer s Guide     Non Primitive Types in Map Keys and Sets    You can now add map keys of a non primitive data type  Map keys can be sObjects  collections  user defined types  and built in  Apex types  Previously  map keys could only be primitive types  Similarly  sets can now contain elements of any data type   This provides you with more choice for what kind of data you can store in your collections     For non primitive types in map keys and sets  except for user defined types  Apex determines the uniqueness of two map keys  or set elements based on the field values  For user defined types  you should provide implementations for the equals and  hashCode methods  Apex uses these methods to compare the instances of your classes     Using Custom Types in Map Keys and Sets    When using a custom type  your Apex class  for the map key or set elements  provide equals and hashCode methods in  your class  Apex uses these two methods to determine equality and uniqueness of keys for your objects     Adding equals and hashCode Methods to Your Class    To ensure that map keys of your custom type are compared correctly and their uniqueness can be determined consistently   provide an implementation of the following two methods in your class       The equals method with this signature     public Boolean equals Object obj        Your implementation         Keep in mind the followin
103. ch those available when adding links in content blocks to  provide a more consistent look and feel  You can also specify where to open the linked item  such as in a new browser window  or in a popup window     See    Displaying Data Using Data Elements    in the online help     New Status Column    Available for purchase in  Enterprise and Unlimited Editions       Available  with limitations  in  Developer Edition    We ve added a Status column to the Site com site list page that shows you what state your site is in     In Development   The site has never been published   Published   The site has been published at least once        Nested Templates    Renamed    Child Templates       Available for purchase in  Enterprise and Unlimited Editions    Available  with limitations  in  Developer Edition       When you create a page template from another page template  the derived template inherits the characteristics of its parent   Therefore  in the interest of clearer and more user friendly terminology     nested templates    are now    child templates        When working with page templates  the Create Nested Template menu option is now Create Child Template     129    Site com Repeaters and Repeater Elements Renamed    Repeaters and Repeater Elements Renamed    Available for purchase in  Enterprise and Unlimited Editions    Available  with limitations  in  Developer Edition       In Winter 13  Repeater Elements and Repeaters in the Page Elements pane are now called    Data Eleme
104. ck  and when Shared Activities is enabled  if IsInvitee  IsParent  and IsWhat are not set  This ensures compatibility for code    written prior to enabling Shared Activities when EventRelation represents event attendees  only        59    Additional Sales Enhancements Label Change for Upload New Document Page    ADDITIONAL SALES ENHANCEMENTS    Label Change for Upload New Document Page    To upload new documents     Create    on documents    On the Upload New Document page  we ve changed the Internal Use Only checkbox to Indicate Document is  Internal for clarity     New Behavior for Partner Portal Email Notifications When  NoChange Owner to Portal User Template  is Selected    In Winter 13  we ve improved the behavior of change owner email notifications sent from portals that don   t have Change  Owner to Portal User Template ora default template set  When a portal user changes the owner of a record to another  portal user whose profile is associated with multiple portals  the email notification sent to the user includes a link to the portal  in which the change of ownership occurred  In previous releases  the link pointed to the oldest login enabled portal that the  user was a member of     SERVICE    CASE FEED ENHANCEMENTS    New Customization Options in Case Feed    Available in  Enterprise  Unlimited  and Developer Editions    Winter    13 gives you more control over the fields and information you include on feed layouts in Case Feed     1  Choose whether the publisher m
105. ck Add   2  Enter the member   s name in the User column  If the partner portal is enabled  choose whether the member is a Partner  User or User  and then enter the member   s name     om Note     When you add an opportunity team member  the member is automatically granted read access to the associated    account     3  Select an opportunity team role for the member    4  Select the opportunity access for the member  The access level can   t be less than your organization   s default opportunity  sharing access    5  Specify values for any custom fields that your administrator has created for opportunity teams     Important  If your administrator has defined custom fields but not added them to the Add Opportunity Team   Members page  you can   t see them when you add a new team member  See    Working with Custom Fields for  Opportunity Teams    in the online help    6  Click Save     a gt   Tip  Run the Opportunities with Opportunity Teams report to list the opportunity team members for the opportunities  a owned by you or users below you in the role hierarchy  The report also shows information about the opportunities  you own and opportunity teams to which you belong     SALESFORCE FOR OUTLOOK ENHANCEMENTS    Boosting Productivity with Salesforce for Outlook    For Winter    13  Salesforce for Outlook includes new features that help your users boost their productivity and improve their  overall experience syncing items with and adding emails to Salesforce     47    Salesforc
106. click Add and Remove to move them between the Available Fields list  and the Selected Fields list  To determine field order in the layout  select fields and click Up  Down  Top  or Bottom    3  Click Save     42    Opportunity Teams Enhancements Customizing Opportunity Teams    OPPORTUNITY TEAMS ENHANCEMENTS    Customizing Opportunity Teams    Available in  Enterprise  Unlimited  and Developer Editions    To enable team selling     Customize Application     To create or change custom fields     Customize Application       To define or change field validation rules     Customize Application       To define Apex triggers     Author Apex       To set up team roles     Customize Application       To add a custom button or link     Customize Application          To edit page layouts     Customize Application        i You asked for it  This enhancement helps address the following ideas on the IdeaExchange       Enable opportunity team automatic notifications     Modify visibility of Opportunity Team related list buttons     Make opportunity team member fields visible     Email opportunity team members     Track time spent by an opportunity team on an opportunity     Alert opportunity team members when added     Make opportunity team fields available in custom report types     Make primary campaign source field visable for opportunity team report    Generate an opportunity history with opportunity team report     Include opportunity team in backup    Opportunity team selling allows 
107. cluding feed improvements using new components and an issue that prevented adding an   mention after a  topic     In organizations that allow Chatter Desktop standard installations  Chatter Desktop prompts current users to install the  updated version  You can also install the updated version from Your Name  gt  Setup  gt  Desktop Integration  gt  Chatter Desktop     In organizations that use the Chatter Desktop managed installer  only system administrators can upgrade users to the new  version     Preview Links       Available in  Group  Professional  Enterprise  Unlimited  Contact Manager  and Developer Editions    Starting with Winter    13  you can preview several other links in your feed in addition to videos from the YouTube community   These rich media previews are powered by Embed ly  a third party service  Currently  we support preview links for the following    domains   YouTube  Vimeo     Mashable      Techcrunch       NYTimes  ReadWriteWeb      SoundCloud    We don   t share any content  user  organization  or account data with Embed ly  We only share the URLs that are on the  domain whitelist  which are currently the seven domains mentioned above  Additionally all of our URL requests pass through  a Salesforce proxy  meaning Embed ly never receives calls directly from the client and therefore doesn   t have information about  who s making the URL request     Sharing a Preview Link    1  Above your feed  click Link   2  Type a link URL to one of the supported doma
108. ct in Apex  The Connect in Apex documentation is available in the  Chatter REST API Developer s Guide     a  Note  Connect in Apex is currently available through a pilot program  For information on enabling Connect in Apex   please contact your salesforce com representative     New ID  getSObjectType Method    The new getSObject Type method on the ID type enables you to obtain the sObject token that corresponds to the sObject  of the ID  This is particularly helpful when you don   t have access to the sObject itself  for example  in future methods that  don   t accept sObject types as their parameters  and therefore you can   t call get SObject Type on the sObject  Also  with this  new method  you don   t have to perform a global describe call to obtain an sObject token for a specific sObject name  You can  simply call getSObjectType on the ID  In this way  you also avoid reaching the describe governor limits     This sample shows how to use the get SObject Type method to obtain an sObject token from an ID  The updateOwner  method in this sample accepts a list of IDs of the sObjects to update the ownerld field of  This list contains IDs of sObjects  of the same type  The second parameter is the new owner ID  Note that since it is a future method  it doesn   t accept sObject  types as parameters  this is why it accepts IDs of sObjects  This method gets the sObject token from the first ID in the list   then does a describe to obtain the object name and constructs a query dynami
109. d   s components     Other limitations of this geolocation beta release include     e History tracking is not available for geolocation fields      Geolocation fields are not supported in custom settings   Geolocation fields are not available in reports  dashboards  validation rules  Visual Workflow  or workflow and approvals   Geolocation fields cannot be searched      Geolocation fields are not available in Schema Builder       DISTANCE and GEOLOCATION formula functions are available only when creating formula fields and in Visual  Workflow       Geolocation is supported in Apex only through SOQL queries  and only at the component level     Creating a Geolocation Custom Field    1  Click Your Name  gt  Setup  gt  Create  gt  Objects and select one of the custom objects in the list   2  In Custom Fields  amp  Relationships  click New   3  Choose Geolocation and click Next     131    Organization Wide Permission Sets Organization Wide Permission Sets Overview    4  Enter the Geolocation field attributes  including Latitude and Longitude Display Notation  which determines how the  notation appears in the Salesforce interface     Degrees  Minutes  Seconds    A notation for angular measurement that is based on the number 60  there are 360 degrees to a circle  60 minutes to  a degree  and 60 seconds to a minute     Decimal    Expresses the value as degrees  and converts the minutes and seconds to a decimal fraction of the degree  Decimal  notation does not use cardinal points  No
110. d Professional Editions    Data com Clean available for an additional cost in  Unlimited Edition       Organizations that use a sharing model may want to allow Data com users to add duplicate account  contact  or lead records  to Salesforce  There are several things to keep in mind when setting your duplicate preferences     106    Data com Data com User Enhancements      Records are considered duplicates when they have the same Data com ID number in the Data com Key field      Duplicates can only be allowed  by object  for the entire organization  not for individual users  If  however  you want to  prevent a user from being able to add duplicates  you can create a trigger      Records that have already been added to Salesforce by any Data com user are marked with an icon     in the search results  and can be re added by any Data com user       When a record is added as a duplicate  it will not be counted against the user   s monthly record addition limit  Adding a  record only counts against a user   s monthly addition limit the first time it   s added to Salesforce     To set up your duplicate preferences  follow these steps     1  Click Your Name  gt  Setup  gt  Data com Administration  gt  Preferences     2  In the Duplicate Preferences section of the page  select which objects you want to allow duplicates for  accounts  contacts   or leads      Data com User Enhancements    Data com offers lots of enhancements for users in Winter  13       Expanded international data off
111. d line number at which the test failed     10  Select a Class in a Tests view to see the code coverage for each method invoked by the class in the Class Code Coverage                   pane   Logs    HeapDumps    Repository   Tests   Query Editor a  Status TestRun Duration Failures Total Overall Code Coverage     x Sj 2012 08 02 12 48 36  jbleyle 180 de 3 6 Class Percent  x 3 TestStripe 2 5 Overall 57 a    E testStripe 0 01 DynamicActionsHandler 0 d  x E testStripeCharge 0 00 Fridge o  EE e   S    v a oes s pax     a    HelloWorldTest 0  x 8    HelloWorldTest 1 1  KitchenUtility 0  New Run    Copy Run    Run All    Abort Collpase All    Expand All   MessageMaker 0    2012 08 02 12 48 36  jbleyle 180 de    Class Method Duration Result Errors Class Code Coverage     TestStripe testStripe 0 01 Skip Methods defined as TestMethod do Class Percent  TestStripe testStripeCharge 0 00 Skip Methods defined as TestMethod do Stripe 6  TestStripe testStripeCustomer 0 00 Pass StripeCardResponseModel 100  TestStripe testStripelnvoice 0 00 Pass StripeCharge 11  TestStripe testStripePlan 0 00 Pass StripeErrorModel 100  HelloWorldTest validateHelloWorld 0 02 Fail System AssertException  Assertion stripeGetResponseValues 0  StripeResponseModel 100   lt  m               149    Developer Console Enhancements Tests Tool    Checking Code Coverage    To deploy Apex code to a production organization  75  of the code must be covered by tests  Code coverage is the percentage  of code covered by tests   
112. d nela       hoa faie Ie   gt    lt link rel  stylesheet  type  text css   href     URLFOR  Resource BrowserCompatibility   css ie7 styles css       gt    lt    endif    gt    lt  head gt    lt body gt    lt hl gt Browser Compatibility lt  h1 gt    lt p gt It s not just a job  It s an adventure  lt  p gt    lt  body gt    lt  apex page gt           Visualforce doesn   t support or evaluate Visualforce tags  for example   lt apex  includeScript  gt   within standard HTML  comments  However  it will evaluate the following expressions within IE conditional comments     e Global variables  such as SResource and  User    The URLFOR   function    See Microsoft   s documentation for Internet Explorer conditional comments for further details of how to use them     Migrating from Escaped Comments    Versions of Visualforce prior to Winter    13 allowed  in certain limited contexts  for conditional comments to be passed through  to the browser when the comments were encoded using escaped     lt     and     gt     characters for the comment delimiters  This wasn   t  intended behavior  and has been corrected     On pages that use API version 26 0 or later  escaped comments render literally on the page  The solution is to change these  pages to use syntactically valid IE conditional comments     Existing pages that use this unintended feature will  in most cases  continue to work in Winter    13 as long as the page is set  to API version 25 0 or below  Customers who made use of this tech
113. d to a data    category group   4  Inthe Default Data Category column  use the drop down to list assign a data category should the information not  map as defined     5  Click Add     Beta limitation    Pre filtering articles based on case information is only supported in text and picklist fields     84    Additional Service Enhancements Universal Knowledge  Sunlight Search    Pilot    Universal Knowledge  Sunlight Search    Pilot    In Winter    13  a redesign of the Salesforce Knowledge Article tab is available in pilot  The new tab displays all your Salesforce  Knowledge articles and any external data sources  such as Microsoft SharePoint  This new Knowledge tab uses federated search  to search all these resources at once  then you can filter article results according to language and data category  To participate  in the pilot program contact your salesforce com representative     ADDITIONAL SERVICE ENHANCEMENTS    Service Cloud Console Integration Toolkit  Multiple  Domains    The Service Cloud console is designed for users in fast paced environments who need to find  update  and create records in  Salesforce quickly  The Service Cloud Console Integration Toolkit is a user interface API that provides advanced administrators  and developers with programmatic access to the console so that they can extend it to meet your business needs  For example   developers can use the toolkit to open and close tabs in the console to streamline a business process  Previously  the toolkit
114. direction set to any of the following directions     Outlook to salesforce com   Salesforce com to Outlook  or    Sync both ways       Your users can now keep Outlook and Salesforce recurring events in sync with Salesforce for Outlook  which supports the  following recurrence patterns       Daily     Weekly     Monthly    Yearly    After syncing recurring events to Salesforce  your users can assign the recurrences to related records  like contacts  accounts   opportunities  and so on  Syncing recurring events also helps your users maintain an accurate view of their availability when  they create events and request meetings from their Salesforce calendars     Considerations for Enabling the Recurring Events Feature    It   s important that you understand the following details before you enable recurring events for your users       When you enable recurring events  you enable the feature for your entire organization  You can  however  choose the  Outlook configurations for which you want recurring events to sync       After you enable this feature  you can   t disable it without help from the salesforce com Support team     All Salesforce for Outlook users will need to upgrade to Salesforce for Outlook v2 0 or later       Recurring events do not appear on the My Unresolved Items page  Instead  your users can go directly to the recurring  events in their calendars to associate the recurring events with Salesforce records       Your users    Salesforce for Outlook configuration s
115. ditional Service Enhancements  2510238 ciscasciescdeviaatbsaclisiai ediass E E N Eaa aee ti iare itt 85  FNIVANV TICS  cs vs sssicsatsvasnis ca satputsewescvewniniaious nhacwauenbsohsieususususubersasensusveussien pun vasebsesneusiaupabcneawawinasessnaeia busin 88  Exportable  Joined Reportss  c scsscrssiccocsconsveievtenerscsbeescaseuseventues evs onsvesovenavesnudes cnedesiesesdsussseuenvensbevgstoreestns cedtesonsuentendegassedevedeonsten 88   Joined Reports on Dashboardss  i csicsissiscasacees ssvssnnvecansiyasoeanaassesivessatessndvedsesanosentues ed oxen one N quansaavensvabneeonevessoes 88  Scatter Charts  on Dashboards ie vis scascsccitevessaescendendet sew tacdans senlevnasiavacuteees vad audbandiadvniad anidasdeas AOE 89   More Support for the Enhanced Reports Tab      eccceessesesesesesesesceeessnseseeeesessssssssesesesescaesesesescesecavanasesesesanseteteesenaneeseeseaes 90  Noni i caviunaniaunceniannanunieawcaunuwunsa annus euuniwun cnasounuaueewonwe 91  Salesforce Toucher an ree ER E EEO OTE OT ENOO EE EET ET 91  Salesforce Mobile SD Raiiacaiedas diciiensnitinwensindd R N E N T N 98  Chatter for iPhone and iPad     Version 2 4 Generally Available           cssessssscececeseessesseseseseececeeceeesessesceanaeaeeeneeesesesesseseneaeae 99  Data  cOM iscssssisscssssssssssssssscssssissosssssssossss  soossss  ssssssoissessssisoessssissossssissesssuisoossuisoossssissose iuis Gecckeaueee  101  Dataycom Product Suite OTe Weirin sn ai an aE E E EEO OOT OOE 101   B A E E E
116. e  and the request failed     Starting with Winter    13  we changed the behavior from taking only the scope of the most recent approval to combining  the scope values from all matching approvals to issue the new access token  If no prior approvals contained a refresh  token  the request still fails due to a lack of approved scopes     OAuth 2 0 JWT Bearer Token Flow    The OAuth 2 0 JWT bearer flow implementation now supports the HMAC SHA256 and RSA SHA256 algorithms   The HMAC SHA256 uses the consumer   s private key as the signing secret  while RSA SHA256 uses an uploaded  certificate  Previously  the JWT bearer token flow implementation used the certificate as the signing secret if one was  uploaded  or the consumer   s private key otherwise     146    Schema Builder Enhancements Security Enhancements    New Auth Provider Parameters    You can now use two new parameters with authentication providers  startURL and scope  The startURL parameter  directs your users to a specific location after authenticating  The scope parameter requests access tokens with additional    permissions  For more information  see    Using Request Parameters with Client Configuration URLs    in the online  help     Login Policy for My Domains Now Explicitly Configured    The Login Policy for My Domains is now explicitly rather than implicitly configured  Prior to Winter 13  if your  organization had SAML enabled  you were automatically asked to log in with SAML instead of with your user name  and 
117. e Salesforce Mobile SDK is an open source suite of developer technologies that simplify the development of mobile  applications     The Mobile SDK provides the following       Native OAuth implementations for Android and iOS that work out of the box    OAuth access token management  including persistence and refresh capabilities      App containers for building hybrid applications    98    Mobile Chatter for iPhone and iPad     Version 2 4 Generally Available    Using the Salesforce Mobile SDK  you can create three types of mobile applications     Native     Native apps are coded using a mobile platform s native capabilities  Typically  these apps are more difficult to  develop  but they also offer the best performance  In this workbook  we show how to construct native applications for iOS    and Android       HTML5     HTMLS apps are built using HTMLS5  CSS and JavaScript  These lightweight server side pages typically  offer the most portability  but don t have access to native platform features  HTMLS apps aren t OS specific  so the same  app will run on an iOS  Android  Windows Mobile  or other device     Hybrid     Hybrid apps use a JavaScript bridge in a native container to merge the portability of HIMLS with native device  capabilities  such as the camera or address book     Because the Mobile SDK is new technology  with many rapid changes expected over the coming year  the most recent release  notes can be found at http   wiki developerforce com MobileSDK     Chatter f
118. e Touch    You must have access to the standard Sales app    Chatter Free users  Chatter Only users  and Chatter customers aren   t able to use Salesforce Touch     Wireless Connection     A Wi Fi   or cellular network connection is required to communicate with Salesforce  For the best performance  we  recommend using Wi Fi  If you use Salesforce Touch on a 3G cellular network  data rates may apply and you may incur  roaming charges while traveling     Offline use of Salesforce Touch isn   t currently supported     93    Mobile Salesforce Touch    Language and Locale     Salesforce Touch works with almost all of the Salesforce supported locales and the fully supported and end user languages   The exception is right to left locales and languages  including Arabic  Hebrew  and so forth   which aren   t currently  supported     Advanced currency management isn   t currently supported     Enabling Salesforce Touch    To view Salesforce Touch settings        View Setup and Configuration       To modify Salesforce Touch settings  Gustauize Appliciion        Modify All Data       To use the Web Services API     API Enabled          Manage Users          To enable Salesforce Touch for your organization     1  Click Your Name  gt  Setup  gt  Mobile Administration  gt  Salesforce Touch  gt  Settings   2  Use Enable the Salesforce Touch downloadable app to control access to the Salesforce Touch app that users  download and install on their mobile devices        By default  the downloada
119. e add email option appears in the Salesforce Side Panel        I Side Panel  Beta   IV Add Email li  I Create Case  i To use this feature you must enable Email to Case               4  Select any other options that apply to your Outlook configuration    5  Click Save    6  Ifyou don   t yet have a remote site configured for your organization  create one now  To do so  click Your Name  gt  Setup   gt  Security Controls  gt  Remote Site Settings    7  Click New Remote Site    8  Add a remote site name  Then  add a remote site URL  which is your organization   s Salesforce URL        Remote Site Edit    Enter the URL for the remote site  All s controls  JavaScript OnClick commands in custom buttons  Apex  and AJAX proxy calls can access this    Remote Site Edit Save     Save  amp  New     Cancel    Remote Site Name   Salesforce Side Panel  Remote Site URL l https   na1 salesforce com     Disable Protocol Security OG       Description  Requirement for using the Salesforce Side Panel in Microsoft Outlook        Active Vv    Save   Save  amp  New     Cancel                9  Click Save     50    Salesforce for Outlook Enhancements Syncing Recurring Events    Syncing Recurring Events    You asked for it  This enhancement is from an idea on the IdeaExchange     Available in  Professional  Enterprise  Unlimited  and Developer Editions    To sync recurring events between Outlook and Salesforce     Recurring Events       In addition     Read    and    Edit    on events  and event sync  
120. e for Outlook Enhancements Viewing Your Salesforce World in Microsoft   Outlook     Beta    Salesforce Side Panel View up to a total of four Salesforce contacts and leads in Viewing Your Salesforce World in  a side panel that appears in Microsoft   Outlook   when Microsoft   Outlook      Beta  users select an email     Users can manually add emails to either one contact and    one account or opportunity  or one lead only     Recurring Events Sync recurring events between Outlook and Salesforce  Syncing Recurring Events    Simplified Email Save time managing the My Unresolved Items page when Saving Time with Email Associations  Associations Salesforce encounters unresolved email addresses from  emails added to Salesforce        Viewing Your Salesforce World in Microsoft    Outlook    Beta      You asked for it  This enhancement is from an idea on the IdeaExchange     Available in  Enterprise  Unlimited  and Developer Editions    To display the Salesforce Side Panel in Outlook     Side Panel      To add Outlook emails to Salesforce     Email to Salesforce     AND     Add Email       To add email attachments to Salesforce     Always save email attachments    in your Email to Salesforce    settings       z     Note  Salesforce contact and lead details can now appear directly in Outlook with the new Salesforce Side Panel   which is currently available as a beta feature in Salesforce for Outlook v2 0 and later     When your users select emails in Outlook  they can now view contact 
121. e implementation of the Support  EmailTemplateSelector interface  The  getDefaultEmailTemplateId method implementation retrieves the subject and description of the case corresponding to  the specified case ID  Next  it selects an email template based on the case subject and returns the email template ID        global class MyCaseTemplateChooser implements Support EmailTemplateSelector       Empty constructor  global MyCaseTemplateChooser             The main interface method  global ID getDefaultEmailTemplateId ID caseld        Select the case we re interested in  choosing any fields that are relevant to  our decision  Case c    SELECT Subject  Description FROM Case WHERE Id  caseld         EmailTemplate et                       ic  Go sWo ect  Comrasaims  Yili YY 1   et    SELECT id FROM EmailTemplate WHERE DeveloperName    LX1150 template       else if c subject contains  LX 1220         et    SELECT id FROM EmailTemplate WHERE DeveloperName    LX1220 template                  Return the ID of the template selected  return et id     The following example tests the above code      isTest  private class MyCaseTemplateChooserTest         static testMethod void testChooseTemplate      MyCaseTemplateChooser chooser   new MyCaseTemplateChooser          Create a simulated case to test with   Case c   new Case      c Subject    I  m having trouble with my LX 1150    Database insert c            Make sure the proper template is chosen for this subject    190    Developer Console Enh
122. e the    Source panel to navigate from System Log view back to Source Code view to edit or view your code     153    Developer Console Enhancements Perspectives in a System Log View    1  In the Developer Console  click the Logs Tab and double click a debug log to open it in a System Log view     2  Click Perspective  Perspective Name  gt  View Panels and select the panels you want to include in the perspective   If you modify a perspective  an   is appended to the perspective name  When you save the perspective  the   is removed     3  To create a new perspective  click Save Perspective As and enter a name for the perspective     Modifying Perspectives in a System Log View    A perspective is a layout of panels in a System Log view in the Developer Console  The default layout includes all panels  To  create layouts that let you work quickly and easily  modify existing perspectives to include only the panels you need     1  In the Developer Console  click the Logs Tab and double click a debug log to open it in a System Log view     2  Click Perspective  Perspective Name  gt  View Panels and select the panels you want to include in the perspective   If you modify a perspective  an   is appended to the perspective name  When you save the perspective  the   is removed     3  Click Save Perspective  You can also click in the System Log view and press CTRL S  Windows  or Command S  Mac  OS      Switching Perspectives in a System Log View  A perspective is a layout of panels in a S
123. e user   s name     If you enable both versions of Salesforce Touch  users can access either option interchangeably     Using Salesforce Touch    To learn about using Salesforce Touch  see the Salesforce Touch FAQ that   s available from the Settings EJ icon in the app     Differences from the Full Salesforce Site    Salesforce Touch doesn   t have all of the functionality of the full Salesforce site  Currently  the Salesforce Sales app is the only  tabset that   s available  Users can work with their accounts  contacts  opportunities  tasks  and any custom tabs that are included  in the Sales app  and they can view any events that are accessible from Open Activities or Activity History related lists  With  a few exceptions  all of the standard and custom fields for these objects are available  Additionally  users can see their Chatter  data  including People  Groups  and feeds        Note  Salesforce Touch uses user profiles and permission sets  so users have access to the same tabs  record types   fields  page layouts  and object permissions that they do when working in the full site  However  any user interface  customizations that your organization implemented programmatically  for example  using Visualforce  JavaScript   and so forth  aren   t accessible in this release     Salesforce Touch has these limits when displaying data     95    Mobile Salesforce Touch      Chatter Groups and People  15 records displayed initially  expandable to 200 maximum    Recent Items  15 r
124. e way questions and answers appear in the feed     70    Chatter Answers New Options to Customize Questions    e The option to flag a post has been moved into the question or answer in the feed  Previously  you had to click More to  select flagging options       Click question titles to display a new view of the question with all of its related answers  This replaces the option See  Detail       Use Like to show support for a question  answer  or knowledge article  With Winter    13  Like replaces Useful in the feed   Additionally  in Open Questions you can now Like a post without having to Follow it  You still receive email updates on  a post when you Follow it       You can now Unfollow questions that are selected as best answers after you ve followed them  Previously  there was no  way to stop following those questions  You ll stop receiving emails when you unfollow the post     New Options to Customize Questions    Available in  Enterprise and Unlimited Editions    To create or change custom buttons and links     Customize Application       To add custom page layouts     Customize Application          With Winter    13  administrators have more options to display a custom view of the Questions detail  edit  and list view pages   Administrators can create custom page layouts  and add buttons and links to Questions       Use a Visualforce page that contains apex detail to override the default single item view for questions  When you override  the default page layout  you ca
125. eHtml4              gt      0 unescapeCsv           0 unescapeXml    180    Developer Console Enhancements Apex Code Enhancements      Determine what type of characters are in the String     isAlpha  isAlphanumeric    isAlphanumericSpace       isAlphaSpace  isAsciiPrintable  isNumeric    isNumericSpace    coco C o a O a    isWhitespace      Other utility methods     getLevenshteinDistance  isBlank   isEmpty   isNotBlank          isNotEmpty    normalizeSpace    o a O a    reverse    For more information about these methods  see the Force com Apex Code Developers Guide     Loading Test Data from Static Resources    Using the new Test  loadData method  you can populate data in your test methods without having to write many lines of  code  Simply  add the data in a  csv file  create a static resource for this file  and then call Test   loadData within your test  method by passing it the sObject type token and the static resource name  For example  for Account records and a static  resource name of myResource  make the following call     List lt sObject gt  ls   Test loadData Account sObjectType   myResource       The Test  loadData method returns a list of sObjects that correspond to each record inserted     You must create the static resource prior to calling this method  The static resource is a comma delimited file ending with a   csv extension  The file contains field names and values for the test records  The first line of the file must contain the field  names and subsequen
126. eam member and the parent  For example  to display opportunity  team member information on the associated account detail page  create a custom lookup relationship field for account on  the opportunity team  add it to the Opportunity Team Member multi line page  and then set this field to the parent  account for each opportunity team member      View limits that apply to the opportunity team such as the maximum number of custom fields you can define      Create custom report types for opportunity teams  The opportunity team must always have a parent object and can   t have  any child objects  For example  an opportunity team member in a custom report type can be related to a parent account  but a contact can   t be related to a parent opportunity team member       Disable team selling to remove default opportunity teams and existing teams on opportunities     Opportunity Team Known Limitations      Administrators can   t define workflows for opportunity teams   e Administrators can   t create a look up from an object  such as an account  to an opportunity team member     e Administrators can create a custom report type for an opportunity team but the opportunity team must always have a parent  object and can   t have any child objects  For example  an opportunity team member in a custom report type can be related  to a parent account but a contact can   t be related to a parent opportunity team member     Opportunity Teams Enhancements Customizing Opportunity Teams    e Admini
127. eate an organization wide permission set     To create an organization wide permission set     1  Click Your Name  gt  Setup  gt  Manage Users  gt  Permission Sets   2  Click New   3  Enter a label  API name  and description     132    Organization Wide Permission Sets Organization Wide Permission Sets Overview    4  For User License  select   None       5  Click Save     In the permission set overview page  a permission set with no associated user license has a blank User License field        Permission Set    Warehousing App       Q Find Settings       Clone   Delete   Edit Properties             Permission Set Overview Assigned Users    Description Grants Create  Read  Edit  and Delete access API Name Warehousing_App    to all objects in the Warehousing app     CreatedBy Jan Lange  6 26 2012 4 54 PM Last Modified By Jan Lange  6 26 2012 4 54 PM             Showing Organization Wide Permission Sets in List Views    Once you ve created multiple permission sets  you might want to keep track of their user license assignments  For a quick  overview of user license assignments in permission sets  create or edit a permission sets list view that includes the User License  column             Click Your Name  gt  Setup  gt  Manage Users  gt  Permission Sets   2  Click Create New View  or select a view and click Edit     Under Specify Filter Criteria  specify the conditions that the list items must match     w    a22 Tip  To show only organization wide permission sets  that is  permi
128. eate permission sets that are associated with those licenses  Organization wide permission sets are a great solution in  these situations  As a best practice  create packaged permission sets that grant access to the components in a package   and not standard Salesforce components  As in any organization  organization wide permission sets respect the contract  terms of any user license     134    User Sharing   Pilot User Sharing Overview    USER SHARING   PILOT    User Sharing Overview    Available in  Enterprise  Unlimited  and Developer Editions       Winter    13 introduces Sharing capabilities to the user object  enabling you to restrict or extend access to user records  These  new features are collectively referred to as User Sharing  and they can   t be used simultaneously with Chatter or the Communities  pilot   z   Note  User Sharing is available through a pilot program  In Winter 13  user sharing can   t be disabled after it is turned  on  For more information on enabling it for your organization  contact salesforce com          With User Sharing  you can grant Read Write or Read Only access to user records  A user record contains a user   s details   including his or her role and profile information  This table explains what it means to have Read access on a user record     User   s name only  You can   t edit the record     User   s name and detail page  You can also see the user in lookups  list views   ownership changes  user operations  and search  Internal user
129. ecords displayed initially  expandable to 100 maximum     Related Lists  30 records displayed initially  not expandable     Search Results  top 5 results per object displayed  not expandable     Tasks  15 records displayed initially  expandable to 100 maximum    Currently  this release doesn   t support       Other standard apps and all custom apps     Objects other than those mentioned in this section    Person Accounts     Standard list views and custom object lists      A few record fields  including     division fields     rich text area fields    O territory management fields      Some related lists and some related list fields     Shared Activities for tasks or events     Archived activities     Dashboards     Search on objects other than accounts  contacts  events  opportunities  tasks  users  and custom objects  e Advanced currency management      Programmatic customizations to the Salesforce interface  including     Custom buttons and links  Web tabs and Visualforce tabs       Visualforce components and S controls       Note      __ Unsupported fields and related lists include links to the full site  where you can see the missing information  Links to  unsupported objects also take you to the full site  In addition  the Actions menu on a record detail pane allows you  to switch to the full site so you can perform tasks not currently available in Salesforce Touch     Salesforce com provides these links for your convenience but using the full site from Salesforce Touch
130. ect  Be sure you re ready to accept these side  effects before finalizing the deletion  See    Deleting Custom Objects    in the online help and    Managing Deleted Custom  Objects    in the online help     Click on the custom object   s icon     oS      Select Delete Object     A dialog box displays that explains the side effects of deleting an object  Read this information  carefully     w    If you accept the conditions  check Yes  I want to delete the custom object   Click Delete      gt     Deleting Custom Fields with Schema Builder    Available in  All Editions    To delete custom fields in Schema Builder   Customize Application        You can now delete custom fields using Schema Builder     Schema Builder displays a list of side effects when you try to delete a custom field  Be sure you re ready to accept these side  effects before finalizing the deletion  See    Managing Deleted Custom Fields    in the online help     1  Right click on the custom field     2  Select Delete Field     A dialog box displays that explains the side effects of deleting a custom field  Read this information  carefully     145    Schema Builder Enhancements More Custom Object Properties in Schema Builder    3  Ifyou accept the conditions  check Yes  I want to delete the custom field   4  Click Delete     More Custom Object Properties in Schema Builder    Two additional custom object properties can now be selected or deselected when working in Schema Builder     Enable Divisions  If your orga
131. ect Type reference to obtain the label for OpenActivity ActivityDate  by specifying the label as follows      lt apex outputLabel for  taskDate  value  Date    gt     Scheduling Push Upgrades    After you ve created a patch version of your package  you can automatically deploy it to customers using a push upgrade     a gt   Tip  Salesforce com strongly recommends following this sequence for pushing package upgrades     1  Push the upgrade to your own organizations so you can run tests and fix any bugs before upgrading subscribers    2  When you re ready and have coordinated with your customers on their change management process  push to a  small number of customer organizations  Try sandbox organizations first  if possible    3  Once youre comfortable with the initial results  push to your wider customer base  based on your agreements with  each customer     206    Developer Console Enhancements Push Major Upgrade    4  Deprecate the previous version of your package in your main development organization  Replace the version on  AppExchange if necessary  and update your Trialforce setup     5  Ifyour upgrade was a patch  after you ve successfully distributed the upgrade to subscriber organizations  reintegrate  those changes into your main development organization  For more information about combining patches into the  main development organization  see    Working with Patch Versions    in the ISVforce Guide     For more information  see    Best Practices for Push Upgrades and
132. ed Organizations to add related organizations to the Hub   Click Save  amp  Next    On the next page  optionally     SE oS      Edit the name of the organization    Write a description for it    Specify one or more tags  separated by commas    7  Click Save     ADDITIONAL FORCE COM ENHANCEMENTS    Workflow Evaluation Criteria Usability Enhancements    Available in  Enterprise  Unlimited  Developer  and Database com Editions    Tasks  Sites  and Email Alerts are not available in Database com       The process of configuring a workflow rule involves specifying evaluation criteria  Many users found this area of the user  interface confusing  so we clarified the text in the field label and options  We also reordered the options to present the simplest  option first  and the most complex option last     am    Note  The default setting hasn   t changed  but it   s now the last option in the list   ae    The evaluation criteria field now appears as follows        created Evaluate the rule criteria each time a record is created  If the rule criteria is met  run  the rule  Ignore all updates to existing records     With this option  the rule never runs more than once per record     210    Additional Force com Enhancements Custom Object Truncation    created  and every time it   s Evaluate the rule criteria each time a record is created or updated  If the rule criteria  edited is met  run the rule     With this option  the rule repeatedly runs every time a record is edited  as long as 
133. eed  add them to your list of selected feed filters     1  Click Your Name  gt  Setup  gt  Customize  gt  Cases  gt  Page Layouts        2  In Page Layouts for Case Feed Users  click        next to a layout and choose Edit feed view    3  In Feed and Filter Options  move the items you want to include in the feed from the Available list to the Selected  list    Click Save     Can    Email Drafts and Approvals    Draft emails let support agents save messages they write to customers without having to send them immediately  and also  make it possible for administrators to create approval processes for email messages  For example  agents can save messages as  drafts so they can gather additional information or confirm troubleshooting steps before replying to a customer  or can take  breaks and log out of Salesforce without losing their work     Approval processes determine how your organization handles draft email messages   specifying  for example  which messages  require approval and whether approvers are automatically assigned  You can create customized approval processes based on  your company   s needs  You might create an approval process to ensure that newer support agents can   t send messages until  they re reviewed by a supervisor  or one that requires all messages related to sensitive issues such as financial transactions to  be approved before they re sent     For more information  see    Working with Draft Emails    in the online help and    Reviewing and Approving Em
134. ements    Available in  Unlimited  Developer  Enterprise  and Database com Editions       The Winter    13 release of the Force com IDE contains the following enhancements       Support for Metadata API version 26 0     All documentation includes Winter 13 content    The Force com IDE is available as a standalone application or as an Eclipse plug in       To install the latest version of the Force com IDE standalone application or Eclipse plug in  download an installer from         wiki developerforce com page Force com_IDE Installation          To upgrade to the latest version of the Force com IDE Eclipse plug in  follow the directions at         wiki developerforce com page Updating_ the Force com_IDE        After you install the Winter    13 Force com IDE  you can upgrade your projects  To upgrade a Force com project   1  Right click a project and choose Force com  gt  Upgrade Project to open the Project Upgrade wizard     REswre HUN LUCA MISTY    I    Force com  gt     Source  gt   PDE Tools  gt        Show in Salesforce Web    Properties Alt Enter       2  On the first page of the wizard  review the information and click Next to continue    3  On the second page of the wizard  review the full details of what will be changed  If you don   t want to upgrade all of these  components  click Cancel  Otherwise click Finish    4  On the final page of the wizard  review your changes    5  Click Finish to retrieve the specified components        Note  Force com IDE releases prior
135. end this fake response by calling  Test  setMock in your test method  For the first argument  pass WebServiceMock class  and for the second argument   pass a new instance of your interface implementation of WebServiceMock  as follows     Test setMock  WebServiceMock class  new YourWebServiceMockImp1           After this point  ifa Web service callout is invoked in test context  the callout is not made and you receive the mock response  specified in your doInvoke method implementation     ym      Note  If the code that performs the callout is in a managed package  you must call Test   setMock from a test method  in the same package with the same namespace to mock the callout       att    This is a full example that shows how to test a Web service callout  The implementation of the WebServiceMock interface  is listed first  This example implements the doInvoke method  which returns the response you specify  In this case  the  response element of the auto generated class is created and assigned a value  Next  the response Map parameter is populated  with this fake response  This example is based on the WSDL listed in Understanding the Generated Code  Import this WSDL  and generate a class called docSamp1e before you save this class      isTest  global class WebServiceMockImpl implements WebServiceMock    global void doInvoke    Object stub   Object request   Map lt String  Object gt  response   String endpoint   String soapAction   String requestName   String responseNs   String
136. ents  To avoid this issue  upgrade to API version 26 0     User Either of the following email You will lose event data when you   integration applications  e Relate multiple contacts to an event that you update in  e Connect for Outlook Salesforce  and      Connect for Lotus Notes   Sync these events from Salesforce to your email system    This issue may occur because the two affected email integration  applications aren   t compatible with the Shared Activities feature   To avoid this issue  consider either upgrading to   Salesforce for Outlook  or not enabling the Shared Activities feature        Enabling Shared Activities    Available in  All Editions except Database com     To view activity settings     View Setup and Configuration     8 P gu    To customize activity settings     Customize Application          The process for enabling Shared Activities can take up to 48 hours  depending on the volume of activities for your organization   While you enable this feature  your users can continue working with tasks and events     1  Goto Your Name  gt  Setup  gt  Customize  gt  Activities  gt  Activity Settings     57    Shared Activities Enhancements Activity Rollup to Accounts for Contacts    2  Select Allow Users to Relate Multiple Contacts to Tasks and Events   3  Click Submit     4  Add the Name related list to the task detail and event detail page layouts so users can see all contacts on an activity  This  is particularly important for Salesforce Mobile users        Afte
137. ents Added a list of new features available after mid October  2012    2012   September 13  Geolocation Custom Field   Beta Added the Geolocation custom field beta announcement    2012    Release Notes Changes    September 12  Connected Applications   Pilot Added the Connected Applications announcement   2012    September 12  Salesforce Touch Updated the process for enabling Salesforce Touch  It   s now   2012 automatically available to all organizations without first contacting  Salesforce Customer Support  but a Salesforce administrator must  enable Salesforce Touch before users can access it  Also  the  Salesforce Touch settings page has been slightly modified     Removed references to Touch App  When the downloadable version  of Salesforce Touch is available  we ll update these release notes     September 12  Environment Hub   Pilot Added editions table for Environment Hub   2012    September 12  Exportable Joined Reports Added edition availability for printable joined reports   2012    September 12  Starting a Batch Job from Another Added a section announcing a change for Apex batch jobs   2012 Batch Job    September 12  Geolocation Custom Field   Beta Updated geolocation field editions table   2012    September 12  Chatter and Salesforce Communities Added edition availability for Salesforce Communities and some  2012  Pilot  Chatter features     September 12  Percentage sizing for Added details for a minor new feature  sizing Visualforce charts  2012  lt apex chart gt  
138. enu appears in the left column or the center column on the Case Feed page   2  Customize the Email publisher by     Selecting which header fields to include    Selecting which email tools  such as templates  to make available to agents    Enabling the rich text editor and  optionally  making it required when agents write email   Specifying From addresses    Making the body field collapsible    Making the email header collapsible     Replacing the standard Send Email button in the Email publisher with a custom button  You can use any custom  button you ve created for cases  except those that have s controls as content sources     3  Customize the articles tool to give agents the option of attaching articles to email messages as PDFs  and use the tool to  replace the standard Salesforce Knowledge sidebar in the Service Cloud console    4  Choose which buttons  lists  and links to include on the Case Feed page  and specify where on the page they appear     5  Choose where and how the feed filters list appears  including making the list floating so that it moves down the page when  agents scroll  rather than remaining static     6  Choose the feed filters to include on the Case Feed page     61                         Case Feed Enhancements Custom Publishers in Case Feed  Customer    case 00001004 Created Date 11 15 2011 2 03 PM Status New  Carole White f  Priority Medium  Unit freezes after downloads    Global Media Case Owner Karen Williams   415  555 1212  Customers VX6 unit h
139. eports Dashboards      D amp B Company    ps Salesforce com  Inc     Edit Layout   Printable View   Help for this Page     lt  Back to List  Leads  Accounts  1     D amp B Company Detail Delete     Search Global Ultimate D U N S       v Overview    Company Description salesforce com knows the power of good customer relations  The company offers hosted applications that  manage customer information for sales  marketing  and customer support  providing clients with a rapidly  deployable alternative to buying and maintaining enterprise software  salesforce com   s applications are  used by more than 100 000 clients for generating sales leads  maintaining customer information  and  tracking customer interactions  The company s applications can be accessed from PCs and mobile  devices  salesforce com   s customers come from a variety of industries  including financial services   telecommunications  manufacturing  and entertainment     Inactive    v Primary Data    Primary Business Salesforce com  Inc  URL  www salesforce com  Name    Primary Address 1 Market Ste 300 Mailing Address  San Francisco  CA 94105 5188  United States    Telephone Number      1 415 901 7000 Facsimile Number    International Dialing 0001 Year Started  Code    Annual Sales Volume    _1 657 139 000 Annual Sales Volume  Indicator    Local Currency Code U S  Dollar Location Type Headquarters Parent  Branches and or  subsidiaries report to the business    Ownership Type Public Out Of Business Not Out of Business
140. er    13 release  Data com has enhanced its D amp B Companies offering to include leads     In Summer    12  with Data com Corporate and Premium products   you got D amp B fields on account records  and with Premium   when you added or cleaned a record  you got a D amp B Company record  if available  linked to that record through its D amp B  Company field     With Winter    13  you get the same features and rich data for leads  To set up D amp B Companies for leads  make sure you follow  the guidelines in the Salesforce help topics    Implementing Data com    and    Implementing Data com Clean        116    D amp B Companies D amp B Companies Administrator Features and Enhancements    D amp B Companies Overview    Data com available in  Contact Manager  Developer  Enterprise  Group  and Professional Editions    Data com available for an additional cost in  Unlimited Edition    Data com Clean available in  Developer  Enterprise  and Professional Editions    Data com Clean available for an additional cost in  Unlimited Edition       Dun  amp  Bradstreet  D amp B  is the world   s leading source of commercial information and insight on businesses  enabling companies  to Decide with Confidence   for over 170 years  D amp B   s global database contains the world   s largest source of business records   and is backed by D amp B   s proprietary DUNSRight   quality assurance process  ensuring you that company information is  complete and accurate     As part of Salesforce   s Data c
141. er a  Integer b     x a   y b     public override String toString      reeneiiicinn Y  Y ae be ap UY de ay ae Ue         PairNumbers p   new PairNumbers  1 2         Converts to String using the Type toString method  String s   String valueOf  p     if Recweass  il  2        It used to return  PairNumbers  x 1  y 2   System assertEquals   1 2    s         System debug use the Type toString method     to convert the type to a string       Writes  1 2  to the debug output  System debug  p         SOQL Polymorphism Available in Apex   Developer Preview    You can use SOQL Polymorphism in your SOQL queries in Apex  This is typically done using the new TYPEOF clause  For  more details about SOQL Polymorphism  see SOQL Polymorphism   Developer Preview on page 163        184    Developer Console Enhancements Apex Code Enhancements    JSON Support for Additional Built In Types    JSON serialization and deserialization support has been added to additional built in Apex types  These types are the return  types of Database methods  namely     DeleteResult     EmptyRecycleBinResult      LeadConvertResult     SaveResult  UndeleteResult  UpsertResult    In addition to these supported types  JSON continues to be supported as previously for sObjects  standard objects and custom  objects   Apex primitive and collection types  and instances of your Apex classes     Code Coverage Percentage Details    The code coverage percentage for a class or trigger displayed on the Apex Classes or the Apex 
142. er information to identify an existing contact  The flow then looks  up the user entered info in the database  If no matching contact is found  the flow displays a screen whose sole purpose is  to tell the user to go back and try again  That screen shouldn t offer a Finish button to the user     Resources for Getting Started with the Cloud Flow Designer    Available in  Enterprise  Unlimited  and Developer Editions    When you open or create a flow in the Cloud Flow Designer  you will see a collection of useful resources to help you build  flows with confidence     Videos   Watch demos on how to get started with Visual Workflow       Flow Sample Package   Install an AppExchange package of sample flows  including some that contain Apex plug ins   The package also includes sample Apex classes you can plug into your flows     Tutorials   Follow simple  step by step instructions in the Cloud Flow Designer Workbook to create sample flows from  scratch     Whenever you want to view this collection of resources from the Cloud Flow Designer  click Get Started     Additional Cloud Flow Designer Usability Enhancements    Available in  Enterprise  Unlimited  and Developer Editions      You can now edit choices  including dynamic choices  from the Screen overlay  Previously  you could only edit choices  from the Explorer     143    Visual Workflow Enhancements Merge Fields in Help Text and User Input Validation Messages    When you select a choice field in the preview pane of the Screen 
143. ers more accounts and contacts          Use new Employee  Revenue  and Location filters to refine your search results     Weve expanded the scope of the green dot      which now identifies records you ve added  exported  or cleaned   either  manually or with automated clean jobs       You can now exclude records you ve already exported or records already in Salesforce when you export Data com search  results      Selections you make from your Data com search results are now preserved across multiple pages      Data com now uses the primary SIC  NAICS  and Data com Industry Category codes to determine the Industry field  on account records      The Industry field value on the account card is now the same Industry value that   s on the account record      IEfyou   re prevented from adding Data com records to Salesforce  you ll now get an error log that tells you which records  couldn   t be added and why not      Ifyou use Data com Premium  search D amp B records for Global Ultimate D U N S Number to see a list of accounts within  an organization   s corporate structure  You can add those records to Salesforce      Weve made several improvements to the reports in the Data com Reports AppExchange Package  which make analyzing  your data easier than ever       You can now search Salesforce by D U N S Number     Expanded International Data from D amp B    In Winter 13  Data com continues to deliver more account and contact information from D amp B  including expanded data for  Aus
144. es to specify the scatter chart  type for a dashboard component and to group  the data again on the scatter chart  Specify  the field by which to group the data using  groupingColumn  For example    lt groupingColum gt FieldName lt  groupingColum gt      Indicates whether to show  true  or hide   false  the Previous button on the screen  at runtime  When true  the Previous button  appears only if the user visited a previous  screen in the flow path  Set this to false when  revisiting the previous screen would trigger  an action that should not be repeated  such as  a credit card transaction     Default  true    You can set either allowBack or  allowFinish to false  but not both     Indicates whether to show  true  or hide   false  the Finish button on the screen at  runtime  When true  the Finish button  appears only if the screen element is the end  of a flow path  Set this to false if you need the  user to go back to a previous screen to  continue or complete the flow  For example   you wouldn   t want to offer a Finish button  on a screen that tells the user to go back and  make corrections on a previous screen     166    Developer Console Enhancements    API Enhancements       Flow  an existing fieldon helpText  FlowScreen and  FlowScreenField     Flow  an existing fieldon choiceReferences    FlowScreenField     Piw len existing fieldon dataType  FlowScreenField     Changed    Changed    Changed    Flow  an existing fieldon defaultSelectedChoiceReference Changed    FlowSc
145. ettings don   t indicate whether their Outlook configurations are set up  to sync recurring events       In Salesforce  if your users delete all occurrences within a series  but not the series itself  Salesforce for Outlook generates  an error message after it syncs to Outlook  Your users can ignore this error message  which clears during the next sync     You can also learn about important  although not critical  details in Understanding Differences Between Outlook and Salesforce  and Modifying Recurring Series     51    Salesforce for Outlook Enhancements Syncing Recurring Events    Enabling the Recurring Events Feature    1  In Salesforce  click Your Name  gt  Setup  gt  Desktop Administration  gt  Outlook Configurations   2  For your Outlook configuration  click Edit   3  Under Advanced Settings  select Recurring Events        Advanced Settings  Adding advanced settings allows you to change the default behavior of Salesforce for Outlook   Add Advanced Setting     amp  After you enable the Recurring Events feature  you cannot disable it  Learn more about recurring events       Save     Cancel             4  Click Save     Understanding Differences Between Outlook and Salesforce    Recurring events work differently between Outlook and Salesforce        Ranges of occurrences If your users    recurrences include more than 100 occurrences  Salesforce for Outlook creates the  series with 100 occurrences in Salesforce     After the dates of occurrences pass  Salesforce for Outlo
146. evelopment    Edition organizations or other organizations  contact salesforce com        2m   Note  The Force com Canvas feature is currently available through a pilot program  For information on enabling it  for your organization  contact salesforce com  Any unreleased services or features referenced in this or other press    158    Developer Console Enhancements API Enhancements    releases or public statements are not currently available and may not be delivered on time or at all  Customers who  purchase our services should make their purchase decisions based upon features that are currently available     Force com Canvas enables you to easily integrate a third party application in Salesforce  Force com Canvas is a set of tools  and JavaScript APIs that you can use to expose an application as a canvas app  This means you can take your new or existing  applications and make them available to your users as part of their Salesforce experience     Instead of redesigning and reintegrating your external applications  you can now use these tools to integrate your technology  within Force com Canvas  Force com Canvas includes tools that handle       Authentication   If your application requires authorization  you can implement it by using a signed request or OAuth 2 0     Cross Domain XHR   JavaScript support for cross domain XML HTTP requests back to the Salesforce domain       Context   API support that enables you to retrieve context information about the environment in which 
147. event     Note  Shared Activities now includes both tasks and events  If you ve already enabled Shared Activities for tasks   Shared Activities will be enabled automatically for events with Winter 13   a    Users select contacts using the Select Contacts dialog box  regardless of the number of contacts they relate to an event     55    Shared Activities Enhancements Shared Activities for Events    Select Contacts x    You can relate this event to as many as 10 contacts  including a designated primary contact  Tell me more        Search     Find       Available   2  Selected   10   3  Edward Stamos Global Media    Jack Rodgers Global Media  3  Carole White Global Media 3  Jon Amos Global Media    3 Liz D   Cruz Global Media    3 Sean Forbes Global Media  Add 3 Edna Frank Global Media Make  L gt J 3 Rose Gonzalez Global Media Primary   4  3  Avi Green Global Media es    Remove      Jane Grey Global Media  3 Geoff Minor Global Media    3 Tom Ripley Global Media             Shared Activities lets your users view       Shared events on the event detail page when the user has access to at least one contact  lead  or related record  Users can  also view events if the user   s role is above the activity owner   s in your organization   s hierarchy  Keep in mind  when users  relate contacts to which other users have access  those users can view the activity along with the names  account names   and titles of all the contacts related to the activity   including the contacts to which th
148. ew Case Feed Methods in the Interaction API    New Case Feed Methods in the Interaction API    With Winter    13  the Interaction API  which also includes Open CTI  has been expanded to include two new methods   onObjectUpdate   and refreshObject     These methods let developers set interactions between elements on a Case  Feed page     onObjectUpdate       Usage    Registers a function to call when case fields  the case feed  or case related list data has changed on a Case Feed page     m      Note  Use this method with Visualforce pages you want to use as custom publishers in Case Feed  For more information    on creating Visualforce pages to use as custom publishers  see Customizing Case Feed with Visualforce        Syntax    sforce interaction entityFeed  onObjectUpdate  callback  function     Arguments    callback function JavaScript method called upon completion of the method        Sample Code JavaScript     lt apex page standardController  Case  gt    lt apex includeScript value   support api 26 0 interaction js   gt    lt script type  text javascript  gt   var callback   function response     alert  Case was updated  Fields       response fieldsUpdated      Related lists       response relatedListsUpdated     Feed        response  feedUpdated           Invokes API method  sforce interaction entityFeed on0bjectUpdate  callback      lt  sieeijone gt    lt  apex page gt     Response    This method is asynchronous so it returns its response in an object in a callback met
149. ew in the Developer Console     To insert a row and save it  the query results must contain all the required fields of the object and the required fields must be  simple text or number fields  If these conditions aren   t true  a blank row is created but you can   t save it  In this case  click  Create New to create a new record in Salesforce     1  In the Developer Console  click the Query Editor tab   2  Execute a query that contains all the required fields of an object   3  In the Query Results view  click Insert Row     Editing and Saving Rows    You can edit and save records  rows  in the Object displayed in a Query Results view in the Developer Console     1  To edit a row in a Query Results view  double click a field in the row and edit it     2  To save modified rows to Salesforce  click Save Rows     152    Developer Console Enhancements Perspectives in a System Log View    f  Warning  If you click Refresh Grid  data in a Query Results view that you   ve edited but haven   t saved is lost     Deleting Rows    You can delete a record  row  in the Object displayed in a Query Results view in the Developer Console     1  To delete a row  select it in the Query Results view   2  Click Delete     Navigating to a Record in Salesforce    After executing a query  you can jump to the record in Salesforce     1  Select a row in a Query Results view   2  Click Create New  Open Detail Page  or Edit Page to jump to the record in Salesforce     Perspectives in a System Log View    
150. feature for  you and you won t be asked to log in again     2  Type in the name of the person you wish to thank  Currently  you can only choose one recipient for a Thanks post  However   you re free to  mention other people in the body of your post  This is not the same as thanking them directly but lets them  know about your Thanks post     Chatter Administrator Settings for Rich Media Previews    3  Optionally  you can change the badge associated with the post  Each post is assigned a default badge  based on your  company   s settings in Work com  Click Change Badge and select another  more specific badge to associate with this post   In the popup window that appears  browse the available badges and click the one most appropriate  After clicking a badge   you ll see details about it and have the option of selecting it for your post  or going back and selecting another badge  At  any time  you can close the popup window to abort picking another badge     2        Note  Ifyou want to create a new badge  you must log in to Work com  New badges cannot currently be created  from inside Salesforce     4  Type in details about why you re thanking the recipient  Youre free to  mention other people in the body of the text   This is not the same as thanking them directly  but lets them know about the post    5  Click Share to finalize the post  You ll see the post in your feed and the recipient of the thanks is notified  Anyone that  was  mentioned in the post   s description text is
151. filelds      The organization property on the Chatter Directory response body is no longer available as of version 26 0  Use the  organization property on the Connect Directory response body instead       Anew Connect Directory response body was added  which provides information about the organization       The new Community and Community page response bodies were added  which provide information about the communities  in the organization     The community property was added to the following response bodies     0 Favorite     Group  Subscription      The Feed Item Page response body was incorrectly documented  It does not return a previous PageUr1 property      Anew Feed Item Attachment  Poll response body was added  which provides information about the feed poll associated  with the feed item    e Anew Feed Poll Choice response body was added  which provides information about the feed poll choice      The following changes were made to the Feed Item response body        attachment now includes the new Feed Item Attachment  Poll response body  type now includes the following new feed item types       ChatTranscriptPost    FacebookPost     PollPost     RypplePost     ReplyPost     TwitterPost       Anewvisibility property was added  which gives information about who can see this feed item       The File Summary and Feed Item Attachment  Content response bodies have the following new properties     0 checkSum   Specifies the MD5 checksum for the file  0 fileExtension   Specifie
152. find an element or resource in  the flow       On the Explorer tab  enter search text    The Explorer tab displays only the elements and resources whose properties contain the entered text     Click A to filter the Explorer tab contents to one type of element or resource    To remove the filter  click A and select SEARCH ALL       Select Highlight Results on Canvas to dim all visible elements on the canvas other than the Explorer search or filter  results     Zoom in and out as desired using the controls near the top right corner of the canvas area       To see the location of an Explorer item on the canvas  complete one of the following procedures        Search Controls in the Cloud Flow Designer    140    Visual Workflow Enhancements Zoom Controls in the Cloud Flow Designer    If the Explorer item is a canvas visible element or a screen field    1  Hover over the item on the Explorer tab    2  Click its A    If the Explorer item is a resource that doesn   t appear on the canvas    1  Click the item on the Explorer tab    2  Click the Usage tab in the Description pane    3  Hover over an element listed on the Usage tab    4  Click its A    The canvas shifts to display the element and momentarily highlights it     Zoom Controls in the Cloud Flow Designer    Available in  Enterprise  Unlimited  and Developer Editions    You can now zoom in and out using the controls located near the top right corner of the canvas area  Combine zoom with the  new search options to greatly ease 
153. fluenceRawRank field  which indicates the Parentld   s Chatter  influence rank  This number is calculated based on the Parentld   s ChatterActivity statistics  relative to the other users  in the organization      The Type field for feed items now includes Pol1Post  which specifies a poll posted on a feed  The Poll Post type  is available for the following objects  AccountFeed  AssetFeed  CampaignFeed  CaseFeed  CollaborationGroupFeed   ContactFeed  ContractFeed  DashboardFeed  EntitlementFeed  EventFeed  FeedItem  LeadFeed  NewsFeed   OpportunityFeed  Product2Feed  ReportFeed  ServiceContractFeed  SolutionFeed  TaskFeed  UserFeed  and  UserProfileFeed     SOQL Enhancements    Use the Salesforce Object Query Language  SOQL  to construct query strings used in Salesforce APIs  For a full description  of the SOQL query syntax  see the Force com SOQL and SOSL Reference     SOQL Polymorphism   Developer Preview    SOQL Polymorphism lets you select different sets of fields in your SOQL queries  depending on the object type of a polymorphic  relationship field  For example  the What field in an Event record could reference an Account  Opportunity  or Campaign   You can now specify different fields to select based on the referenced object type using the TYPEOF clause  The following  example specifies different fields for each of the possible object types        SELECT  TYPEOF What  WHEN Account THEN Phone  NumberOfEmployees  WHEN Opportunity THEN Amount  CloseDate  WHEN Campaign THEN
154. forecast currency  For example  say the forecast currency  for your organization is set to the organization   s corporate currency of U S  Dollars  Without changing the display currency  to U S  Dollars  a forecast manager using Canadian Dollars to forecast can now adjust a subordinate   s forecast who might use  Indian Rupees  The forecast manager will see the adjusted amount in Canadian Dollars  To update the forecast display currency   from your own forecast page click Display Settings  gt  Change     Configurable Forecast List View for the Opportunity Pane    Available in  Professional  Enterprise  Unlimited  and Developer Editions    To customize the opportunity pane     Customize Application       To view setup and configuration     View Setup and Configuration          z   Note  This information applies to the Forecasts product beginning with the Winter    12 release and not to Customizable    Forecasts        Configurable Forecast List View is available  Opportunities appear below the rollup table in a forecast in a list that responds  to user selections  Administrators select up to 15 standard and custom fields that appear in the opportunity pane  Users see  the fields selected based on their field level security settings  Opportunity Name isa required field  Additionally  salesforce com  recommends adding Forecast Category to the pane     1  Click Your Name  gt  Setup  gt  Customize  gt  Forecasts  gt  Settings    2  Under Opportunity List Column  select fields and 
155. form user license because the  license doesn   t allow access to opportunities     To assign permission sets     Click Your Name  gt  Setup  gt  Manage Users  gt  Users     Select a user     In the Permission Set Assignments related list  click Edit Assignments     kh wWNnN e      To assign a permission set  select it from the Available Permission Sets box and click Add  To remove a permission set  assignment  select it from the Enabled Permission Sets box and click Remove     5  Click Save     Best Practices for Organization Wide Permission Sets    Specifying a user license option    You can only specify the user license when creating a new permission set  you can   t change its user license when editing  or cloning it     Editing organization wide permission sets  When editing organization wide permission sets that are already assigned to users  any additional permissions and  settings that you enable must be allowed by all assigned users    licenses or the edit will fail  For example  if an existing    permission set is assigned to a Salesforce Platform user  you can   t enable    Modify All Data    in the permission set because  the user license doesn   t allow it     Using organization wide permission sets in packages  When creating permission sets for AppExchange packages  you can   t always anticipate the user licenses within organizations  that will install a package  Furthermore  if you don   t have the required user licenses in your own organization  you can   t  cr
156. g when implementing the equals method  Assuming x  y  and z are non null instances of your  class  the equals method must be     Reflexive  x equals  x    Symmetric  x equals y  should return true if and only if y  equals  x  returns true   Transitive  if x   equals  y  returns true and y  equals  z  returns true  then x equals  z  should return true  Consistent  multiple invocations of x equals  y  consistently return true or consistently return false    c oS oS co o gt     For any non null reference value x  x   equals  nu11  should return false    The equals method in Apex is based on the equals method in Java     The hashCode method with this signature     public Integer hashCode         Your implementation         Keep in mind the following when implementing the hashCode method     169    Developer Console Enhancements Apex Code Enhancements    0 Ifthe hashCode method is invoked on the same object more than once during execution of an Apex request  it must  return the same value      If two objects are equal  based on the equals method  hashCode must return the same value     0 Iftwo objects are unequal  based on the result of the equals method  it is not required that hashCode return distinct  values     The hashCode method in Apex is based on the hashCode method in Java     Another benefit of providing the equals method in your class is that it simplifies comparing your objects  You will be able  to use the    operator to compare objects  or the equals method  For exam
157. gather data by  providing a list of choices  For example  you are in charge of planning an annual sales meeting and need to find out when most  people are available to attend the meeting  Instead of emailing everybody in the sales organization  you could create a poll in  the Sales Chatter group that lists possible dates and ask people to vote for the date that works best for them     Posting a Poll    1  Above the feed  click Poll   2  Type a question in the text box   You can add a hashtag or mention someone   3  Type at least two choices   Click Add more choices to add another choice  You can enter up to ten choices     4  Select to post the poll to your followers or to a group     If you   re posting the poll to a group  select the name of the group from the drop down list   5  Click Share to post the poll     Anybody with access to the poll or the post can select one of the choices and click Vote to submit their vote  People can only  cast one vote  but they have the option to change their vote     Chatter Tab Navigation Enhancements    We   ve collapsed the Chatter Tab sidebar to streamline the navigation on the Chatter tab  On the left sidebar of the Chatter    Tab  you now see      Feed  which contains all of your feeds  The feeds are still the same  We just renamed them and consolidated  them into one navigation filter     Click    Feed to see available feeds  then click a feed to display the associated subset of posts     26    Chatter Chatter Influence Calculation 
158. ge  the linked record will be identified by its D U N S Number in the D amp B  Company Record Linked field     Expanded Definition of tnactive Status for Account Records    A Data com status of Inactive now includes records that D amp B has classified as non marketable  The expanded definition  now includes any of the following     The record contains out of date or inaccurate information  such as an invalid email address   The company associated with the account or contact record is no longer in business       The company associated with the account record has been classified by D amp B as non marketable    A non marketable company  as defined by D amp B  is one that is believed to be in business and Aas not requested exclusion  from the D amp B database  but whose D amp B record has not been updated in the past 24 months and does not include a complete  business name  a valid physical or mailing address  or an SIC code     D amp B COMPANIES    D amp B Companies Administrator Features and Enhancements    Winter    13 offers lots of great enhancements for D amp B Companies     With Data com Corporate and Premium  get D amp B Company fields on lead records  With Premium  get a linked D amp B  Company record  if available  when you add or clean a lead record       Ifyou use Data com Premium and the Data com Clean product  you can now set up clean jobs to automatically update  D amp B Company records linked to accounts and leads     D amp B Companies for Leads GA    For the Wint
159. geolocation based on the provided latitude and longitude  Must be used with the DISTANCE function     As a beta release feature  geolocation is supported in the SOAP API  with limitations  in Winter 713     You can calculate distances in SOQL using the DISTANCE and GEOLOCATION functions   DISTANCE and GEOLOCATION are supported in WHERE and ORDER BY clauses in SOQL  but not in GROUP  BY or SELECT      DISTANCE only supports the logical operators  gt  and  lt   returning values within   lt   or beyond   gt   a specified radius      Syntax is restricted when running SOQL queries  When using the GEOLOCATION function  the geolocation field  must precede the latitude and longitude coordinates  For example  DISTANCE  warehouse _location_c    GEOLOCATION  37 775  122 418      km     works but DISTANCE  GEOLOCATION  37 775  122 418    warehouse location__c     km     doesn   t work      Geolocation is supported in Apex only through SOQL queries  and only at the component level  In other words  you have  to query the latitude or longitude  you can   t query the compound location field                            For more information  including sample queries  see the Force com SOQL and SOSL Reference     Aggregate Function Enhancements    The COUNT  fieldName  SOQL aggregate function changed to ensure consistent behavior  In rare cases  a SOQL query  using the COUNT  fieldName  aggregate function used to return a single row containing nu11 if no rows matched the query  filtering conditi
160. gin enabled portal that the  user was a member of     ANALYTICS    Exportable Joined Reports    You can now select a printable view of joined reports  You can use that view to export all the data that   s displayed in your  joined report to a spreadsheet application  The data is grouped  filtered  aggregated  and displayed the same way as in your  browser     Available in  Enterprise  Unlimited  and Developer Editions       Youasked for it  This enhancement addresses an idea on the IdeaExchange     Use the printable view when you want to work with the data in a joined report while not logged into Salesforce  For example   you might want to share data with a colleague  or pull a table into a presentation slide     For a complete view  click Show Details  then Printable View  When you open the resulting   x1s file  all of the data in  your report is present  Your printable view can display up to 2000 rows of data      For a summary view  click Hide Details  then Printable View  This  x1s file shows a condensed view of your report   using the summary fields you have chosen     Joined Reports on Dashboards    You can now show a joined report on a dashboard by selecting the chart used in the report     Available in  Enterprise  Unlimited  and Developer Editions    To create  edit  and delete dashboards     Run Reports    AND    Manage Dashboards          To create  edit  and delete dynamic dashboards     Run Reports    AND    Manage Dynamic Dashboards            Youasked for it  T
161. gt  UserList   SELECT id FROM User where ProfileId IN  ProfileList         Assign the permission set in the new package to those users   List lt PermissionSet gt  PermissionSetToAssignList    SELECT id Name  FROM PermissionSet where Name  TestPermSet  AND  NamespacePrefix    TestPackage      PermissionSet PermissionSetToAssign   PermissionSetToAssignList 0     Set lt ID gt  UsersSet   new Set lt ID gt        for User us   UserList      PermissionSetAssignment psa  new PermissionSetAssignment       psa PermissionSetId   PermissionSetToAssign id    psa AssigneelId   us id    UsersSet add us id                                     isTest  D  lolie sracte woul test  1  PostInstallClass myClass   new PostInstallClass     Test testInstall myClass  null         Known Limitations for Push Upgrade  The following are known limitations when pushing an upgrade       Settings for tab visibility are not carried over by permission sets  Hence  if your upgrade requires changes to tab settings   you can   t implement the changes automatically using a post install script  Instead  you ll need to notify administrators to  make the change manually      Push upgrade fails if the package contains Visualforce markup that attempts to access the OpenActivity entity  For  example  the following code in the package will cause the push upgrade to fail      lt apex outputLabel for  taskDate   value    SObjectType OpenActivity fields ActivityDate label     gt     As a workaround  avoid using the global Obj
162. h D amp B Company records by Global Ultimate D U N S Number to see a list of  accounts within an organizations   s corporate structure and then add those accounts to Salesforce  The Global Ultimate is the  highest entity within an organization and is identified by a nine digit Global Ultimate D U N S Number  All companies  that are part of the same corporate structure as the Global Ultimate are identified by the same Global Ultimate D U N S  Number     Note  Before you can search by Global Ultimate D U N S Number  the Search Global Ultimate D U N S  button must be added to the D amp B Company page layout     1  Go to the detail page of the D amp B Company record you want to find accounts with the same Global Ultimate D U N S  Number for    2  Click Search Global Ultimate D U N S   The Data com tab opens and displays a list of accounts that match the Global Ultimate D U N S Number of the D amp B  Company record    3  If the results list is long  you can sort the results by any table heading  The Location Type heading  for example  sorts   results by headquarters  single location  and branch     Ifyou don   t see what you re looking for  use filters to narrow your results     For more information about a particular account  such as its account site  click the account name to see its account card     Add all accounts or a selection to Salesforce     Nw Bp      From the confirmation message  click Go to Accounts to view the list of new records on the Accounts home page     Here a
163. h Data com   s     a gt  Tip  From the Clean Status field  you can also get additional status information  such as which fields have    different data in Data com  and then clean the record  Just click the status icon      and the popup will guide you     3  Compare the two records side by side  You ll see a check mark next to any Data com field value that matches the  corresponding value in your Salesforce record    4  Select the check box next to any Data com value you want to accept    5  Click Save when you re satisfied that the record is accurate  even if you don   t accept any data from Data com   The Clean Status field reflects the record   s current status and its time stamp is updated to reflect your activity     am    Note  If you click Cancel  your Salesforce record   s data won   t be updated  but if Data com finds a better match  for the record  the values in its Clean Status and Data com Key fields may change  These two fields always  reflect the best match from Data com as of the most recent clean process  whether the record was cleaned manually   by you  or automatically  via Clean jobs      115    D amp B Companies D amp B Companies Administrator Features and Enhancements    If your organization uses Data com Premium and you ve cleaned an account or lead record that doesn   t yet have a D amp B  Company record linked to it  Salesforce will create a D amp B Company record  if available  and link it when you click Save   The next time you open the comparison pa
164. hange to the Chatter tab in Salesforce Touch  To be consistent with Chatter enhancements in the  full site  the My Chatter feed filter is now called What I Follow  The  Me filter  however  hasn   t been renamed to match  the full site     And in case you missed it  these important enhancements were released in July    12       You can create and edit account  contact  opportunity  and task records  as well as records for custom objects that are  included in your Salesforce Sales app  You can   t create or edit events at this time      The Salesforce Touch user interface has a new  lighter look  As a result of the redesign  the Chatter subtabs now use Feed   Groups  and People labels instead of icons      The Salesforce Touch FAQ was reorganized to incorporate new topics for the create and edit features  The previous Working  in Touch section is now called Working with Records and the tasks and events topics are now available in the new Tracking  Activities section     Salesforce Touch Requirements    These are the requirements for using both the downloadable and mobile browser versions of Salesforce Touch   Devices    Apple iPad  2nd  and 3rd generation   with iOS   version 5 0 or higher   Browsers    The default iPad browser  Safari    Private Browsing must be turned off  Tap the iPad Settings icon  then select Safari and set Private Browsing to Off   Salesforce    Chatter must be enabled for your organization    You must have an active Salesforce account to access Salesforc
165. hanges in your package into two categories     1  Enhancements to existing features that users already have access to   Use a post install Apex script to automatically assign  the relevant components to existing users  This ensures all current users of the package can continue using it without explicit  action by administrators    2  New features you re introducing for the first time   Don   t use a post install Apex script to auto assign components  This  ensures your subscribers have the opportunity to decide if and when to use the new features     Here are some additional guidelines to keep in mind when planning a push upgrade       Avoid changes to validation rules  formula fields  and errors thrown from Apex triggers  as they may negatively impact  subscribers    integrations      Don   t make visible changes to a package in a patch  This is because other than a change in the package version number   subscribers aren t notified of push upgrades      Test your upgraded package in multiple environments  replicating all relevant features of your customers    organizations   including editions  customizations  other installed packages  and permission sets      Schedule push upgrades at your customers    off peak hours and outside of salesforce com s major release windows  to  minimize potential subscriber impact      Notify your subscribers in advance about the timing of the upgrade  its potential consequences  and any steps they need to  take     Assigning Access to New Com
166. haring rules   including up to 50 criteria based sharing rules     User sharing rules based on membership enable user records belonging to members of one group to be shared with members  of another group  Before you can create a membership based user sharing rule  confirm that the appropriate groups have been  created  For example  if you wish to share users who are based in San Francisco with members of the Sales Agent role  you  may have two groups with the selected members in each group     To create a user sharing rule     137    User Sharing   Pilot User Sharing Overview    Click Your Name  gt  Setup  gt  Security Controls  gt  Sharing Settings    In the User Sharing Rules related list  click New    Enter the Label Name and click the Rule Name field to auto populate it   Select a rule type    Depending on the rule type you selected  do the following     ie Y E    Based on group membership  Users that are members of a group can be shared with members of another group  Inthe Users who are members  of line  select a category from the first drop down list and a set of users from the second drop down list  or lookup  field  if your organization has over 200 groups  roles  or territories      Based on criteria    Specify the Field  Operator  and Value criteria that records must match to be included in the sharing rule  The fields  available depend on the object selected  and the value is always a literal number or string  Click Add Filter Logic     to change the default AND re
167. he Critical Updates page  You must make this  change by the date indicated on the Critical Updates page  See    Critical Updates Overview    in the online help for details about  managing critical updates     If your organization contains pages or components with the problem installed from managed packages  you might need to  contact the package   s supplier to obtain a newer  corrected  version     Changes to Expression Evaluation with Nu11 Values    Expression evaluation has been changed to throw a specific exception when the value on either side of a relative comparison  is null  For example  this expression causes a runtime error when currentReservations or maxReservations is null        currentReservations  lt  maxReservations     The affected comparison operators are     e  lt   less than       lt    less than or equals       gt   greater than       gt    greater than or equals     202    Developer Console Enhancements Push Major Upgrade    Previously  this programming error produced the value nu11  rather than a Boolean true or false  This often caused  difficult to diagnose misbehavior on affected pages     Additionally  the result of equality comparisons involving nu11 values has changed to always return a Boolean true or false   The affected equality comparison operators are           equals         not equals     Previously  equality comparisons with nu11 on either side resulted in nu11  rather than a Boolean value   This change is versioned  You must update your V
168. hich fields display in the layout  select one or more fields in Available Fields and click Add or Remove     To sort fields in the layout  select one or more fields in Selected Fields and click Up or Down      To select multiple fields individually  use CTRL click      To select multiple fields as a group  use SHIFT  click     5  Click Save to apply your changes     Using Opportunity Teams    As a user  you can now do more with opportunity teams       When adding or editing members to your opportunity teams  specify values for any custom fields that your administrator  has defined      Create custom reports for opportunity teams to get a clear picture of how your teams are performing      Include custom fields for opportunity teams in your reports       View the Opportunity Team related list on additional pages  if your administrator has customized page layouts to include  this list     Note  Previously  opportunity teams were called sales teams       i    46    Salesforce for Outlook Enhancements Boosting Productivity with Salesforce for Outlook    Adding Members to an Opportunity Team    Available in  Enterprise  Unlimited  and Developer Editions    To add team members to an opportunity     Read    on opportunities    Owner of opportunity record  or above owner in your  organization s role hierarchy    To view an opportunity for which you re a team member     Read    on the opportunity       1  View the opportunity and navigate to the Opportunity Team related list  then cli
169. his enhancement addresses an idea on the IdeaExchange     A joined report can contain data from multiple standard or custom report types     To show a joined report on a dashboard     88    Scatter Charts on Dashboards    Analytics    1  Edit the dashboard     2  From the Data Sources tab  drag and drop a joined report that includes a report chart     3  Edit the joined report dashboard component and select Use chart as defined in the source report        r                Account Name   B Harmon  Consulting   M Larry Baxter   M Advanced  Interconnecbons    E Fire Suppression  Systems inc   Homeland  Product Co    E Opportunity  Resources Inc   B Optos inc    Bet inc   B United Partners      Valley Supply  inc     BGusto  Distributing   E Universal  Services   B Southem  Research Co    5 Anaco Limited   B UlyssesNet    Component Editor Help for this Page   x   7  Use chart as defined in source report  am wW         O as   a w    Component Data    Formatting J  15   ren ears z 200 m  Maximum Values 700 m  Displayed   900 jaa  100 M  Pols Range z  1200 M  G1400 E  1 700 JE  Legend Position v 1 900 W  2 000 p  Data Labels i 2100 E  101  2 400 Mit   0 00  100 00  200 00  Average Annual  Revenue  Millions   oK Cancel    x          You can schedule and email a dashboard that has joined reports for refresh  You can   t filter data on a joined report in dashboard    view or add a filter to a dashboard that only has joined reports     Scatter Charts on Dashboards    You can now select 
170. his in one of our conference rooms  You do need to have the  multiple HDMI in the extension card for your   X5  Once you have the card       Topics installed  you can have up to six web cams and have a split screen with  Video Conferencing everyone on the monitor   General Questions July 11 2012 gh 0 K0  vx5 Show 3 answers  Cirrus View    Users earn points when their posts receive votes or are selected as a best answer in any of the communities to which they  belong  When they earn enough points  the hover shows their reputation as well as the number of posts and best answers they  have in that community     68    Chatter Answers Customizing Chatter Answers in Portals using Visualforce Pages    Chatter Answers comes with the following pre defined reputation levels that apply to all communities     0 499  500     1999    2000     4999  5000        To add or edit reputation level names or points per level in any of your communities  use the ChatterAnswersReputationLevel  object in the API  You can create up to 25 different reputation levels in the application  Colors for the different reputation  levels can be changed at the stylesheet  CSS  level     Customizing Chatter Answers in Portals using Visualforce  Pages    Available in  Enterprise and Unlimited Editions    You can create a Visualforce page that displays a Chatter Answers community in a Customer Portal or Partner Portal  By  using a Visualforce page  you can add custom widgets to Chatter Answers  such as announcements
171. his type  and optionally  of the    aie specified record type ID and with default custom field values     loadDefaults The recordTypeId argument specifies the record type ID  of the sObject to create  If no record type exists for this  sObject  use nu11  If the sObject has record types and you  specify nu11  the default record type is used     The loadDefaults argument specifies whether to populate  custom fields with their predefined default values  true  or  not  false      Remarks     e For required fields that have no default values  make sure  to provide a value before inserting the new sObject   Otherwise  the insertion results in an error  An example  is the Account Name field or a master detail relationship  field    Since picklists and multi select picklists can have default  values specified per record type  this method populates the  default value corresponding to the record type specified   If fields have no predefined default values and the  loadDefaults argument is true  this method creates  the sObject with field values of null    If the loadDefaults argument is false  this method  creates the sObject with field values of null     This method populates read only custom fields of the new  sObject with default values  You can then insert the new  sObject with the read only fields  even though these fields  cannot be edited after they   re inserted     Ifa custom field is marked as unique and also provides a  default value  inserting more than one new sObject will
172. hod  The response object contains the  following fields     66    Case Feed Enhancements New Case Feed Methods in the Interaction API    fieldsUpdated boolean true if one or more case fields were updated           relatedListsUpdated boolean true if one or more case related lists were updated        feedUpdated boolean true if the case feed was updated        refreshObject       Usage    Notifies the Case Feed page that case fields  the case feed  or case related list data has changed  and forces an update of these  on the page     Note  Use this method with Visualforce pages you want to use as custom publishers in Case Feed  For more information  on creating Visualforce pages to use as custom publishers  see Customizing Case Feed with Visualforce     j  J    Syntax    sforce interaction entityFeed refreshObject    objectId string   refreshFields boolean   refreshRelatedLists boolean   refreshFeed  boolean  callback  function        Arguments    objectId string The record ID of the case object        refreshFields boolean Indicates that one or more fields on the case have changed           refreshRelatedLists boolean Indicates that one or more case related lists have changed           refreshFeed boolean Indicates that the case feed has changed        callback function JavaScript method called upon completion of the method        Sample Code JavaScript     lt apex page standardController  Case  gt     lt apex includeScript value   support api 26 0 interaction js   gt     lt a
173. hod executed during a test run     Lines of code that are covered are blue  Lines of code that aren   t covered are red  Lines of code that don   t require coverage   for example  curly brackets  comments  and System  debug calls  are left white     150    Developer Console Enhancements Tests Tool       Browsers           2012 08 02 12 48 36  jbleyle 180 de      StripeErrorModel      StripeCustomer              Code Coverage  All Tests 85         3   gt   3         ow    N e    EncodingUtil base64Encode  headerValue       e    40 system debug          hs getBody           ul oe     gt  WW Ww       41   42   43   44 system debug     statuscCode   hs getStatuscCode        45  else  s               6  When you edit class with code coverage  the blue and red dims to indicate that the coverage is no longer valid  When you  edit and save a class  the coverage is removed for that class  In the Overall Code Coverage panel  the class name is marked  with a small red triangle to indicate that it was edited since tests were run  To check coverage for that class  run the tests                   again    Browsers  y    2012 08 02 12 48 36  jbleyle 180 de     StripeErrorModel     StripeCustomer          Code Coverage  All Tests     GoTo    Saving         p p power eT A   29 http setMethod   POST      30 Blob headerValue   Blob valueOf API_KEY           31 String authorizationHeader    BASIC       32 EncodingUtil base64Encode  headerValue    p   33 http setHeader   Authorization   authoriza
174. hoose the specific groups  users  roles  or territories who will have access by adding their names to the Share With list     5  Select the access level for the record you are sharing     Possible values are Read Write or Read Only  depending on your organization wide defaults for users  You can only grant  a higher access than your organization wide default     6  Click Save     To edit or delete the record access  click Sharing on the record  and click Edit or Del next to the manual share  You can   t edit  the access in some cases  such as when your organization wide defaults is set to Public Read Only and the only valid access  level on the manual share is Read Write     Note these restrictions when sharing external users with internal users     High volume portal users Share with internal users only  You can   t share internal users    with high volume portal users     Guest users Share with internal users  and vice versa           View All Users    User Permission       View All Users    grants users Read access to all users in the organization  including both active and inactive users  portal users   and guest users  Only users in the User Sharing pilot program can use this permission  which lets a user view all user records  regardless of the sharing settings     System administrators and users with the    Manage Users    permission get the    View All Users    permission automatically with  User Sharing     VISUAL WORKFLOW ENHANCEMENTS    Search Controls in the Cloud
175. ick OK      To create a shortcut  click  Add Keyboard Shortcut  type the action the shortcut will perform  a Console Event  Name  which is a unique identifier  the combination of key commands to use  and click OK  For the new shortcut to  work  you must send the Console Event Name to the developer who defined your shortcut   s action so that he or  she can add it to the method that will trigger your shortcut             To deactivate a shortcut  deselect Active next to the shortcut   s name  You can   t delete the default shortcuts provided  by Salesforce  but you can edit or deactivate them     7  Click Save     After you ve customized keyboard shortcuts for a console  notify users assigned to that console about the actions they can  perform     wa Note     _     You can have up to 144 shortcuts for each console  which includes the default shortcuts provided by Salesforce  and any you create       Keyboard shortcuts aren   t case sensitive  even if you press SHIFT before a letter key  For example  SHIFT  b is  the same as SHIFT B       IfCTRL  ALT  or SHIFT is in a keyboard shortcut  the sequence of those keys doesn   t matter  For example   CTRL ALT A is the same as ALT CTRL A       Ifyou create or customize keyboard shortcuts to include standard browser shortcuts  such as CTRL F  your  shortcuts might not work as intended     a gt   Tip  You can include as many keys in a shortcut as you want  but we recommend that you limit a shortcut to three      keys so that users can e
176. icles    In Winter 13  you can have a mail merge template for articles  A mail merge template allows you to send a personalized email  with the article     ym    Note  The Send Test and Verify Merge Fields popup for text  HTML  and custom email templates is not  supported for article types     For more information  see    Managing Mail Merge Templates    in the online help   Sharing Rules for Knowledge    You asked for it  Salesforce Knowledge addresses the following ideas on the IdeaExchange  improve data category  selection and visibility and article visibility based on permission sets     Available in  Enterprise  Unlimited  and Developer Editions    Data category visibility determines the individual data categories  categorized articles  and categorized questions that a user  can see  In Winter    13  data category visibility can be assigned with permission sets and profiles  as well as roles  This allows  administrators to assign visibility to High Volume Customer Portal users who don   t have roles     Now  both the Permission Set and Profile setup pages have options to assign data category visibility     1  Click Your Name  gt  Setup  gt  Manage Users  gt  Permission Sets or Your Name  gt  Setup  gt  Manage Users  gt  Profiles   2  Click on a permission set or profile name     3  Click Data Category Visibility        Apps  Settings that apply to Salesforce apps  such as Sales  Assigned Apps  and custom apps built on Force com Settings that specify which apps are  Learn
177. imit of 3 MB     Now that you have specified the values of the fake response  instruct the Apex runtime to send this fake response by calling  Test  setMock in your test method  For the first argument  pass HttpCalloutMock class  and for the second argument   pass a new instance of your interface implementation of HttpCalloutMock  as follows     Test setMock  HttpCalloutMock class  new YourHttpCalloutMockImp1           After this point  ifan HTTP callout is invoked in test context  the callout is not made and you receive the mock response you  specified in the respond method implementation     am      Note  Ifthe code that performs the callout is in a managed package  you must call Test   setMock from a test method  in the same package with the same namespace to mock the callout     hot    This is a full example that shows how to test an HTTP callout  The interface implementation   MockHttpResponseGenerator  is listed first  It is followed by a class containing the test method and another containing  the method that the test calls  The testCallout test method sets the mock callout mode by calling Test   setMock before  calling get InfoFromExternalService  It then verifies that the response returned is what the implemented respond  method sent  Save each class separately and run the test in CalloutClassTest         isTest  global class MockHttpResponseGenerator implements HttpCalloutMock       Implement this interface method  global HTTPResponse respond HTTPRequest req        
178. imited  and Developer Editions with the Service Cloud    The Service Cloud console is designed for users in fast paced environments who need to find  update  and create records  quickly  Now  if a Service Cloud console is set up  you can choose to save user sessions so that when console users close their  browsers or log out of Salesforce  any previously open navigator tabs  primary tabs  or subtabs automatically display when they  log in again  Additionally  if console users resize an interaction log or any sidebar components  such as pinned lists  or they  close the global search header  those customizations automatically display when users log in again  This helps users to continue  working from where they last left off in a console without having to start from scratch  For example  here   s a Service Cloud  console with several open tabs  a hidden global header  a resized interaction log  and a resized pinned list  Even if this user  sessions ends  all of these items display to a user when he or she logs in again     79    Service Cloud Console Automatically Saved User Sessions for the Service Cloud Console          cm  A   JH Sowan ame AER   7    Account Name    Phone   All Accounts w  Edit  Delete   Create New View sslenforce ccms  view llintancied   415  901 7000    EEJ eo  S oe                Description Shipping Address                            Founded in March 1999  salesforce com The Landmark   One Market  Suite 300  New Account  t   http  www salesforce com  bui
179. in CalloutStaticClassTest        Paolic Glass CallovcScacicelass 1  public static HttpResponse getInfoFromExternalService String endpoint      HttpRequest req   new HttpRequest     req setEndpoint  endpoint    req setMethod  GET      Http h   new Http     HttpResponse res   h send req    return res            isTest  private class CalloutStaticClassTest     isTest static void testCalloutWithStaticResources         Use StaticResourceCalloutMock built in class to     specify fake response and include response body     in a static resource   StaticResourceCalloutMock mock   new StaticResourceCalloutMock       mock setStaticResource   mockResponse      mock setStatusCode  200     mock setHeader  Content Type       application json          Set the mock callout mode  Test setMock  HttpCalloutMock class  mock         Call the method that performs the callout  HTTPResponse res   CalloutStaticClass getInfoFromExternalService     http   api salesforce com foo bar                Verify response received contains values returned by      the mock response       This is the content of the static resource   System assertEquals    hah   fooled you     res getBody      System assertEquals  200  res getStatusCode      System assertEquals  application json   res getHeader  Content Type        174    Developer Console Enhancements Apex Code Enhancements    Testing HTTP Callouts Using Mult iStaticResourceCalloutMock    Apex provides the built in Mult iStaticResourceCalloutMock class that you can
180. ing  Be aware that either approach might be a security risk because it allows arbitrary content  including  JavaScript  that can be used in a malicious manner  This is true for all formula fields that use HY PERLINK      whether  displayed in Visualforce or in the standard Salesforce interface     Formula fields are only unescaped in the above two situations  Formula fields displayed using expressions continue to be  escaped  For example     Here is the URL    someSObject customURL     When used this way  the URL field is escaped and appears as HTML in the user   s browser  not as an active link     Changes to Escaping Behavior    Prior to the Winter    13 release  text in some Visualforce pages and components might have been generated incorrectly  This  markup could contain fragments that should have been escaped  for example  the   lt   character generated as   amp lt    but were  not  These fragments might be interpreted by the browser as markup rather than as text in the page  This problem has been  corrected for all pages with API version 26 0 or later     Your organization might contain pages or components that depend on this incorrect processing  These pages need to be fixed   To fix them  use  lt apex  outputText gt  with the attribute escape  false  to generate unescaped text     For existing organizations  the Critical Updates page shows a pending change  When you have corrected any pages or  components that depend on the incorrect behavior  activate the change on t
181. ing gt  m   new Map lt PairNumbers  String gt      PairNumbers pl   new PairNumbers  1 2     PairNumbers p2   new PairNumbers  3 4        Duplicate key   PairNumbers p3   new PairNumbers  1 2     pue  jl     sbaLieswe   2    170    Developer Console Enhancements Apex Code Enhancements    m put p2     second     Mowe  JOS   tarre  iy       Map size is 2 because the entry with     the duplicate key overwrote the first entry   System assertEquals 2  m size           i Use the    operator  i  pl    jos      System debug  pl and p3 are equal              Perform some other operations   System assertEquals true  m containsKey pl     System assertEquals  true  m containsKey p2     System assertEquals false  m containsKey  new PairNumbers  5 6        for PairNumbers pn   m keySet       System debug  Key      pn         List lt String gt  mValues   m values     System debug  m values      mValues         Create a set   Set lt PairNumbers gt  sl   new Set lt PairNumbers gt      simacdch oul y   al ECE  A   al ECES  A       Verify that we have only two elements       simece the p3 ws  equall to pl   System assertEquals 2  sl size        Support for Testing Callouts    Apex now provides the ability to test callouts  The native support for handling callouts made in test context and generating  artificial responses increases your code coverage by tests and simplifies the testing process  You no longer need to modify  auto generated code of an external SOAP Web service  or add extra logic f
182. ins   3  Type a name for the link or leave the Link Name field blank     If you provide a link name  we ll use yours  If you leave the Link Name field blank  the preview populates the link name  with the title or name from the site URL     4  Click Share   After the post is rendered in the feed  we transform the post to a rich media preview including thumbnails  descriptions and    video players  for video URLs   Ifa post doesn   t render a link as a rich preview in the feed  the URL domain for that link  either isn   t supported or Embed ly was unable to return the preview content for the URL     29    Chatter Work com in Chatter   Pilot    Rich media previews are supported for link posts  but not for URLs that are added to the text body of the post itself     Work com in Chatter   Pilot    Available in  Professional  Enterprise  Unlimited  and Developer Editions    2m    Note  This feature is currently available through a pilot program  For information on enabling it for your organization     please contact salesforce com     Work com is a suite of human capital management products that enable you to find  align  and motivate your workforce   Starting with Winter    13  some Work com features are integrated into Chatter  You can now create a Thanks post to recognize    a colleague and view Work com profile content in Chatter     Enabling Work com in Your Organization    1  Click Name  gt  Setup  gt  Customize  gt  Work com  gt  Work com Thanks      Select Enable and click S
183. ion  gt   Default  SIC Description  NAICS Code  gt   Default  NAICS Code  NAICS Description  gt   Default  NAICS Description  Company Description  gt  Skip Mapping    Resetto Defaults       Customizing Data com to Salesforce Field Mappings    Data com available in  Contact Manager  Developer  Enterprise  Group  and Professional Editions    Data com available for an additional cost in  Unlimited Edition    Dooa Clean available in  Developer  Enterprise  and Professional Editions    Data com Clean available for an additional cost in  Unlimited Edition    To implement Data com     Customize Application       To enable Data com users     Manage Users       To install AppExchange packages     Download AppExchange Packages          Before you begin  make sure you understand how mapping works  what preparations to make  and what kind of results you  should expect     1  Click Your Name  gt  Setup  gt  Data com Administration  gt  Field Mapping     104    Data com Data com Administrator Features and Enhancements    2  For each Data com field you want to map  select a Salesforce field  If you don   t want to map a field  select Skip Mapping        Note  Not all Data com fields are available for all Salesforce fields  To be mappable  the new Salesforce field must  be the same data type as the default field  For example  the Description field can be mapped to a long text area  field with 1 000 characters or more     Custom field mappings apply when     e Data com records are added to Sa
184. iptions    In Winter    13  were running a script to clean up follows for inactive records  We remove subscriptions to records that meet  all of the following criteria     The record never had any posts or comments   The record was never changed in any way that   s tracked in Chatter during the past 45 days     The record has no tracked change of any age that   s been liked or commented on     We run the script only once after your organization gets the Winter    13 release  The script automatically unsubscribes anyone  who was following the record  We don   t remove the record itself  just the subscription to the record  Removing unused record  subscriptions frees up subscription capacity for customers getting close to their subscription limit        Create and Own New Chatter Groups    User Permission    Use the    Create and Own New Chatter Groups    user permission to control which users can create new Chatter groups or be  assigned as owners of Chatter groups  This permission is turned on by default for all standard profiles     Chatter REST API Enhancements    Winter    13  Chatter API version 26 0  improvements       General Updates  New and Changed Resources     New and Changed Response Bodies  New and Changed Request Bodies    Attention  Resources  parameters  and response bodies change from release to release  We strongly recommend  testing your application in a test environment before deploying it to production     General Updates      Version information was added
185. ireisivriu eaire isie nie au n i evaaa 127   Ste Mapi Links vrer esrin ea a EAE EE E EEEE EE E ER ENE EEEE EE EEEE 128  Cascading    Editability s saisorariseirira nanas nne TT NENO TOE OEEO OEE EE 128  Default Content in Editable Page Elementsesisceininonicaninie dii n ee E a E a i 128  Improved  Linking in Data Elements     i cc  ses secussastesonsseseosssensunstsednonsveseucusicoschsusunstebuvongunsesvenbhins NEE ANES EKAN N E NENES NEEE ets 129   New Status ColumMiisnosicnuiessmranni irienna a a N N A E NRA a 129     Nested Templates    Renamed    Child Templates             s ssessessersrrssesrteseesresrestesrtsrsersssrssrsstesteseeeneenrertsnteneennssnesrrsresresrresrentes 129  Repeaters and Repeater Elements Renamed     ccssicssesvsssesssasserosessssvssnacensssvennatonssosevsotenaneseicenseiesonsvensassnavensepeevsesosenessvedeonen 130  FO HOG ON ode sciatic cco wists redacted oct oe vaio cc ead oe ea cio cits me ead oe ee a een a eae mwa ue manOnoneeaReaate 131  Geolocation Custom Field   Betas icsccisciacsacsacssvocsocvactaensusacacusecacnsenasnanssvacuasnaensuasuasea duacvavnavactasdavnaentuadualencvtententavsaevaceneats 131  Organization Wide Permission  Sets  iscssscscsscksesssessseestustuentueteesensvesecsseavenes vebvoresetensedevschesensedscensva ses stevseesensedaaesvudeeveseueonsens 132   User Sharing Pilots cesccttsiseiectsdtcusng cast n E E A EATEN AENEA OE EE E E TOETA 135   Visual Workflow  Embhanicenne ints scsi    ciscisecectscvacstevsisstecencvsedeesev
186. is a read only object linking a ForecastingItem with its opportunities  such as opportunities  that share the same owner or forecast category and have a closing date within the period of the forecasting item   Available in API versions 26 0 and greater      ForecastingItem  This is a read only object used for individual forecast amounts  Users see amounts based on  their perspectives and forecast roles  The amounts users see include one of the following   AmountWithoutAdjustments  AmountWithoutManagerAdjustment  ForecastAmount   OwnerOnlyAmount     Changed Objects  These objects have changed in API version 26 0       The SiteDomain object has been deprecated  Use the Domain and DomainSite objects instead     160    Developer Console Enhancements API Enhancements      Inthe Event object  the WhatCount and WhoCount fields have been added  In addition  you can update only the  IsReminderSet and ReminderDateTime fields of a child event  See Event and EventAttendee Object Changes       In the ForecastingQuota object  the StartDate field now includes nillable     In the KnowledgeArticleVersion object  the ArticleType field has been added       Inthe OpportunityTeamMember object  the CurrencyIsoCode field has been added  In addition  this object now  supports describeLayout    and describeSObjects    calls       Inthe PermissionSet object  the UserLicenseld field is now nillable     In the Idea object  the IdeaThemelID field has been added       Inthe Case object  the CreatorFullPho
187. isualforce pages to API version 26 0 to enable the new behavior     It   s a best practice to verify that a variable isn   t nul1 before using it  For example  change the previous expression to         currentReservations    null   amp  amp   maxReservations    null   amp  amp    currentReservations  lt  maxReservations       Alternatively  ensure that variables  properties  and attributes can   t be nu11  For example  initialize member variables  set the  default attribute on  lt apex attribute gt   and so on     am   Note  This change affects Visualforce expression evaluation only  Formula evaluation in custom fields is unchanged       A    Restrictions and Validation on Help URLs in  lt apex  sectionHeader gt     New restrictions and validations for the help attribute of  lt apex  sect ionHeader gt  address a security vulnerability with  this component  A help URL must now be a fully qualified  absolute  or relative URL  JavaScript URLs are no longer  permitted     This change is not versioned and affects all Visualforce pages  Existing pages with invalid help URLs will now display a  warning icon      instead of the usual    Help for this Page    link     Push Major Upgrade    Available in  Developer Edition    To push an upgrade     Upload AppExchange Packages          a    Note  This feature is available only to eligible salesforce com partners  For more information on the Partner Program   including eligibility requirements  please visit us at www salesforce com partne
188. k a     E Sent Items        Deleted Items  1  one     Johannes Kienzle   amp  Calendar good news  83 Contacts N    g     Madison Rigsby Fri 7 27 Teresa Monroe    GW Journal           RE  Business trip to San Francisco n     Junk E mail SVP  Operations  la  Notes   Acme   itl   A Outbox tmon expresslandt com   BS  RSS Feeds P   503  421 7800  ire  Search Folders M   503  421 5451  xg  Suggested Contacts View Contact in Salesforce  p Sync Issues  Bj Tasks Open Activities  Activity History  Opportunities  25k Regulators Q7  Close Date 8 16 12   Value Proposition  500 Monitors  Close Date 8 10 12    Prospecting  Jon Amos    ME Edna Frank   it  ABM daa    o Feedback  Items  2        Reminders  12 All folders are up to date      Connected to Microsoft Exchang    4             1  Users can see the contacts  leads  activities  and opportunities to which they ve added emails  Your users can also click the  search icon   E  to find other contacts  leads  accounts  and opportunities  and then add emails to them  There   s even a  collapse icon        to hide the side panel    2  The side panel displays contacts and leads based on the order they appear in the From  To  and Cc fields in your users     emails  Users can view       Contacts and their related activities and opportunities    e Leads and their related activities    If you have the Social Accounts and Contacts feature enabled in Salesforce  the side panel displays either Facebook   or  Twitter    profile pictures for contacts a
189. kage    Get the permission sets that have access to those pages     Get the list of profiles associated with those permission sets     Get the list of users who have those profiles assigned     Assign the permission set in the new package to those users    global class PostInstallClass implements InstallHandler    global void onInstall InstallContext context         Get the Id of the Visualforce pages  List lt ApexPage gt  pagesList   SELECT Id FROM ApexPage WHERE NamespacePrefix     TestPackage  AND Name    vfpagel                  Get the permission sets that have access to those pages   List lt SetupEntityAccess gt  setupEntityAccessList    SELECT Id   ParentId  SetupEntitylId  SetupEntityType FROM SetupEntityAccess  where SetupEntityld IN pagesList     Set lt ID  gt  PermissionSetList   new Set lt ID gt                           for SetupEntityAccess sea   setupEntityAccessList     PermissionSetList add sea ParentId      List lt PermissionSet gt  PermissionSetWithProfilelIdList     SELECT id Name  IsOwnedByProfile  Profile Name   ProfileId FROM PermissionSet where IsOwnedByProfile   true  AND Id IN  PermissionSetList             205    Developer Console Enhancements Push Major Upgrade      Get the list of profiles associated with those permission sets   Set lt ID gt  ProfileList   new Set lt ID gt        for PermissionSet per   PermissionSetWithProfilelIdList     ProfileList add per Profileld           Get the list of users who have those profiles assigned   List lt User 
190. l account     To achieve the above requirements  you can set the default internal and external access to Private  and extend access using  sharing rules  manual sharing  or user permissions  Employees can be granted the    View All Users    permission     This graphic illustrates how the organization wide defaults work with sharing rules  manual sharing  and the    View All Users     permission        Employees Agents  Sharing rules  group to  group  let agents see          employees   i a oe Ba a J  a 2 Internal users  View All Users Sharing rules  group to  permission lets group  enable agents to see  employees see all other relevant agents   internal and extemal  users  Private  organization wide  default    Manual sharing lets agents    see relevant customers   External users    Customers  High volume portal users under  the same portal account can see  each other     136    User Sharing   Pilot User Sharing Overview    You can set the sharing defaults to Private or Public Read Only for internal and external user records  It must be set to Private  if at least one user shouldn   t see a record  After setting the defaults  you can open up access by granting Read Write or Read  Only access to selected user records     To set the organization wide sharing defaults for the user object    1  Click Your Name  gt  Setup  gt  Security Controls  gt  Sharing Settings   2  Click Edit in the Organization Wide Defaults area    3  Select the default internal and external access you wan
191. laborate with coworkers    wu Rk WN    Work with real time data by refreshing desired areas of Salesforce Touch    Salesforce Touch Enhancements in this Release    Salesforce Touch is generally available in Winter    13  This release includes these enhancements       There are now two versions of Salesforce Touch to choose from  In addition to the mobile browser app that runs in the  Safari on iPad web browser  there   s also a downloadable app that   s available from the Apple App Store or AppExchange  Mobile and installs directly on your iPad      TheEnable Salesforce Touch for all users option on the Salesforce Touch Settings page in the full site  Your  Name  gt  Setup  gt  Mobile Administration  gt  Salesforce Touch  gt  Settings  has been renamed Enable the Salesforce          92    Mobile Salesforce Touch    Touch mobile browser app  This option now controls whether or not users are automatically redirected to Salesforce  Touch when logging in to Salesforce from the Safari on iPad web browser  The setting applies to all users in your organization  and is off by default        The Salesforce Touch Settings page also includes a new option called Enable the Salesforce Touch downloadable  app  This option allows users to log in to the Salesforce Touch app that users download and install on their mobile devices   It applies to all users in your organization and is enabled by default     You can now mention people in Chatter posts and comments       There   s a small label c
192. lationship between each filter     6  Inthe Share with line  specify the group who should have access to the user records  Select a category from the first  drop down list and a set of users from the second drop down list or lookup field     7  Select the sharing access setting for users     Read Only Users can view  but not update  records     Read Write Users can view and update records        High volume portal users and guest users cannot be included in sharing rules  Use manual sharing when sharing high volume  portal users and guest users with internal users     Granting Access to User Records Manually    To grant access to your own user record     View All Users       To grant access to any other user record     Manage Users          Users can manually grant or increase access to user records if others cannot access it through other methods such as the  organization wide defaults  sharing rules  or role hierarchy  Users inherit the same access as users below them in the role  hierarchy  High volume portal users can be included in manual shares to be shared with other users     To grant access to a user record     1  Click Sharing on the user record you want to share     The Sharing Detail page lists the users  groups  roles  and territories that have access to the user record     2  Click Add     3  From the drop down list  select the group  user  role  or territory to share with     138    Visual Workflow Enhancements Search Controls in the Cloud Flow Designer    4  C
193. lds and delivers customer San Francisco  CA 94105  aje c olelF elHlila K L M  N olPlalRis T ulv w  x yY Zz  Other  AM   W Details   Mr  Marc Benioff   z  Action Account Name t Billing State Province Phone Type  Edit  Dei    Acme NY  212  555 5555 Prospect Mr  Marc Benioff Oey ee E  Edit   Del    Global Media Ontario  905  555 1212 Prospect    Edit  Del    salesforce com CA  415  901 7000 Customer Boase             u f  show Feed   Folow    Interaction Log  5  Save Log Save  amp  New Log  Name Mr  Marc Benioff v as Account  salesforce com      Enter your notes here   o    Subject                   Navigator tab      Primary tabs    Subtabs    Pinned list    nk WN        Interaction log    Saving User Sessions for a Service Cloud Console    Available in  Enterprise  Unlimited  and Developer Editions with the Service Cloud    To save user sessions for a Service Cloud console     Customize Application          Ifa Service Cloud console is set up  you can choose to save user sessions so that when console users close their browsers or log  out of Salesforce  any previously open navigator tabs  primary tabs  or subtabs automatically display when they log in again   Additionally  if console users resize an interaction log or any sidebar components  such as pinned lists  or they close the global  search header  those customizations automatically display when users log in again  This helps users to continue working from  where they last left off in a console without having to start fro
194. lds to better fit your organization   s activity patterns  You can now tailor how Chatter influence is  calculated for your organization by specifying the minimum activity before users are included in the calculation     Customizing Chatter Influence    Customize Chatter activity thresholds to improve the Chatter influence calculation     Available in  Group  Professional  Enterprise  Unlimited  Contact Manager  and Developer Editions    To customize Chatter influence     Customize Application          1  Click Your Name  gt  Setup  gt  Customize  gt  Chatter  gt  Influence    2  Click Edit to change the minimum activity thresholds   All minimum activity thresholds default to zero  If you set non zero thresholds  users who don   t meet all three minimums  are considered observers and aren   t counted when calculating people   s relative rank in the organization  Users who do meet  all three minimums but have low activity numbers relative to active influencers and top influencers are also considered  observers  however  they are counted when calculating influence     27    Chatter Improved Posting Experience    3  Click Save   Chatter influence is recalculated when you save these values     a Warning  Use caution when setting new thresholds because users    influence levels can change immediately     Improved Posting Experience    Weve made posting even easier  You can now post to your followers or to any group you re a member of directly from the  Home tab  Chatter tab  or yo
195. lesforce      Salesforce records are matched with Data com records and cleaned either manually or with automated jobs    Understanding Data com to Salesforce Custom Field Mapping    Data com available in  Contact Manager  Developer  Enterprise  Group  and Professional Editions    Data com available for an additional cost in  Unlimited Edition    Data com Clean available in  Developer  Enterprise  and Professional Editions    Data com Clean available for an additional cost in  Unlimited Edition       Create custom mappings from Data com fields to Salesforce account  contact  and lead fields to get Data com values in the  Salesforce fields where you want them  Not all Data com fields are available for all Salesforce fields  To be mappable  the new  Salesforce field must be the same data type as the default field  For example  the Description field can be mapped to a long  text area field with 1 000 characters or more     Custom field mappings apply when     Data com records are added to Salesforce      Salesforce records are matched with Data com records and cleaned either manually or with automated jobs  Before you map fields  make sure you understand these potential outcomes and the related actions you should take       Mapping fields or updating mappings forces a full sync with Data com  all records of enabled CRM objects  accounts   contacts  and leads  are updated  even if no records have changed      Data com field mappings may conflict with any Salesforce field customiza
196. lforce charting offers enhanced rendering control  including delayed loading of data  reloading data  showing and hiding  charts  and support for re rendering charts via partial page refreshes  Rendering controls are generally used in conjunction    with JavaScript Remoting     The  lt apex  chart gt  component now supports setting the height and width attributes as percentages  in addition to pixels   Use pixels for consistent sizing and behavior across browsers and screen sizes  Use percentages when the size of your chart  should vary with the screen size  or when the data set can produce very large and small charts     194    Developer Console Enhancements Additional Visualforce Enhancements    Compatibility with Charting Pilot    Charts created using the Pilot version of Visualforce charting are compatible with the GA version of charting  with these  exceptions       The border attribute is no longer available on the  lt apex chart gt  component  Remove the border attribute from any  charts that used it       The change in the default color scheme means that the visual appearance of existing charts will change     Additional Visualforce Enhancements    Available in  Group  Professional  Enterprise  Unlimited  and Developer Editions    Custom controllers and standard controller extensions are not supported in Group or Professional Editions     To create  edit  and set version settings for Visualforce pages     Customize Application          To edit custom Visualforce contr
197. lick Approved Connections  You can view and remove your approved connections on  this page but you can   t add them directly     Removing an approved connection means that you re revoking the external application   s access to your data in Chatter  The  next time you access the external application  you won t be able to connect using the previously authorized login     Warning  Only click Remove if you   re sure you want to revoke the connection  There is no confirmation step and  the approved connection is removed immediately     To restore a connection that you ve removed  simply create the connection again the next time you access the external application   After you authorize the connection  it   s saved as a new approved connection     Google Talk in Salesforce No Longer Supported By Google    Deactivating Google Talk     Customize Application          Google is constantly changing and evolving their technology infrastructure  As a result of these changes  the Google Talk  sidebar is no longer available within Salesforce     To deactivate Google Talk in Salesforce     1  Click Your Name  gt  Setup  gt  Google Apps  gt  Settings   2  In the Activate Google Apps Services list  next to the Google Talk Sidebar Component option  click Edit     34    Additional Chatter Enhancements Unfollow Unused Record Subscriptions    3  Deselect the Active checkbox   4  Click Save     For alternative ways to use Google Talk  see the Google Talk online help     Unfollow Unused Record Subscr
198. limited  and Developer Editions       Encourage Collaboration with Idea Themes  3 30 minutes     You asked for it  This enhancement is from an idea on the IdeaExchange     Idea Themes lets you invite community members to post ideas about specific topics so that members can solve problems or  propose innovations for your company  For example  to engage with your community and create excitement around the launch  of a new product  you can ask community members to work together to create the product   s name  Community members  collaborate and add ideas to the idea theme  while you monitor their activities as they vote and comment on each other   s ideas  until they find a winner     When you create an idea theme  you can add pictures  videos  and other multimedia content to showcase or explain the idea  that you re presenting to the community  You can also view and manage the list of ideas that have been posted to the idea  theme        Idea Theme Edit Layout   Printable View   Help for this Page    Q Pick the color for our new Spider Laptop    Idea Theme Detail Edit    Delete     Clone    Status New Community Spider Laptops  Categories Laptop Design  Title Pick the color for our new Spider Laptop  Description What colors would you like to see for our new line of laptops     passia     Edit     Delete   Clone    g Ideas Post an Idea       Posted By Vote Score Comments  Edit  Del mall for primary colors noupta 20 1  Edit   Del White an re an industry standard kadams 20 o        
199. lly refresh a form with inline edit enabled  dependent picklists      lt apex  form gt    lt     other form elements        gt      lt apex outputPanel id  locationPicker  gt    lt apex outputField value    Location country   gt    lt apex inlineEditSupport event  ondb1lClick    gt    lt  apex outputField gt    lt apex outputField value    Location state   gt    lt apex inlineEditSupport event  ondb1lClick    gt    lt  apex outputField gt    lt apex outputField value    Location city   gt    lt apex inlineEditSupport event  ondb1Click    gt    lt  apex outputField gt    lt  apex outputPanel gt   Ves poe SS   lt apex commandButton value  Refresh Picklists  reRender  locationPicker    gt    lt  apex  form gt                 All of the inline edit enabled picklists are wrapped in the  lt apex  output Pane1 gt  component  The  lt apex  output Panel gt   is rerendered when the  lt apex  commandButton gt  action method is fired     Map Attributes for Custom Components    It   s now possible to assign maps to attributes of custom components  Declare the map attribute like this      lt apex component gt    lt     Attribute definitions    gt    lt apex attribute name  items  description  A map of items to be listed    type  map  required  true   gt         lt     Component implementation    gt    lt ul gt    lt apex repeat value    items   var  itemKey  gt    lt li gt  lt strong gt   itemKey  lt  strong gt    items itemKey    lt  li gt    lt  apex repeat gt    lt  ul gt    lt  apex co
200. louts Using Static Resources    You can test HTTP callouts by specifying the body of the response you d like to receive in a static resource and using one of  two built in classes   Stat icResourceCalloutMock or MultiStaticResourceCalloutMock     Testing HTTP Callouts Using Stat icResourceCalloutMock    Apex provides the built in Stat icResourceCalloutMock class that you can use to test callouts by specifying the response  body in a static resource  When using this class  you don   t have to provide your own implementation of the HttpCalloutMock  interface  Instead  just create an instance of Stat icResourceCalloutMock and set the static resource to use for the response  body  along with other response properties  like the status code and content type     First  you must create a static resource from a text file to contain the response body     1  Create a text file that contains the response body to return  The response body can be an arbitrary string  but it must match  the content type  if specified  For example  if your response has no content type specified  the file can include the arbitrary  string abc  If you specify a content type of application json for the response  the file content should be a JSON string   such as   hah   fooled you       2  Create a static resource for the text file     a  Click Your Name  gt  Setup  gt  Develop  gt  Static Resources  and then New Static Resource   b  Name your static resource    c  Choose the file to upload    d  Click Save    
201. m Data com   The Clean Status field reflects the record   s current status and its time stamp is updated to reflect your activity     am    Note  If you click Cancel  your Salesforce record   s data won t be updated  but if Data com finds a better match  for the record  the values in its Clean Status and Data com Key fields may change  These two fields always  reflect the best match from Data com as of the most recent clean process  whether the record was cleaned manually   by you  or automatically  via Clean jobs      124    D amp B Companies D amp B Companies User Features and Enhancements    If your organization uses Data com Premium and you ve cleaned an account or lead record that doesn   t yet have a D amp B  Company record linked to it  Salesforce will create a D amp B Company record  if available  and link it when you click Save   The next time you open the comparison page  the linked record will be identified by its D U N S Number in the D amp B  Company Record Linked field     Finding and Adding Data com Accounts by Global Ultimate D U N S  Number    Data com available in  Contact Manager  Developer  Enterprise  Group  and Professional Editions    Data com available for an additional cost in  Unlimited Edition    Data com Clean available in  Developer  Enterprise  and Professional Editions    Data com Clean available for an additional cost in  Unlimited Edition       To add accounts from Data com    Create    on accounts    If you use Data com Premium  you can searc
202. m Now Come with Clean Enabled    In Summer    12  when you implemented Data com Corporate or Data com Premium  you had to enable Clean functionality  before your users could manually clean account  contact  and lead records  With Winter 13  we ve eliminated that extra step  and enabled Clean for you  To take a look  just go to Your Name  gt  Setup  gt  Data com Administration  gt  Clean  gt  Settings   For complete details  check out    Configuring Data com Corporate        Configuring Data com Premium     in the Salesforce  help     am Note  To get automated clean jobs  you need to purchase the Data com Clean product     Data com Clean User Features and Enhancements    Check out these new Data com Clean user features for Winter 713     When you add a Data com contact as a lead or clean a lead record  if Data com has a D amp B record for the lead   s company   we ll create a D amp B Company record and link it to the lead through its D amp B Company field  Read the    D amp B Companies     section of these release notes for more information about D amp B Company records added to leads      Our definition of Inactive now includes the D amp B designation of    non marketable     This may cause you to see more  records with Inactive status     113    Data com Clean Data com Clean User Features and Enhancements    Adding Data com Contacts as Leads    Data com available in  Contact Manager  Developer  Enterprise  Group  and Professional Editions    Data com available for an additio
203. m reports and two corresponding dashboards  Use these tools to find out how many records are  sourced from Data com  who has added them and when  and how they contribute to your sales forecast and revenue     Important Considerations for Organizations Using Jigsaw for Salesforce    Jigsaw for Salesforce is an older version of the product that is no longer for sale  It provides similar search  add  and clean  functionality  but it works differently from the Data com product suite built in to Salesforce  The Salesforce online help and  release notes describe the built in Data com Corporate and Premium products only  not Jigsaw for Salesforce  If your organization  is still using Jigsaw for Salesforce  you should consider migrating to the built in Data com product suite for your prospecting  and cleaning needs  For information  please contact your Salesforce account manager     102    Data com       Data com Administrator Features and Enhancements    Important   You should not attempt to migrate to the built in Data com Clean product without having first purchased it through    your Salesforce account manager  If you attempt to enable the built in Data com Clean product without purchasing  it  you ll see an error message  Your organization does not currently have the permission  to run Clean jobs     DATA COM    Data com Administrator Features and Enhancements    Setting up and maintaining Data com has never been easier  In Winter    13  we bring you the following new features  
204. m scratch     1  Click Your Name  gt  Setup  gt  Create  gt  Apps   2  Select a Service Cloud console app    3  Click Edit    4  Click Save User Sessions    5     Click Save     80    Salesforce Knowledge Minor Salesforce Knowledge Enhancements    Repeat these steps for each console     SALESFORCE KNOWLEDGE    Minor Salesforce Knowledge Enhancements    The following Salesforce Knowledge enhancements are available in Winter    13       For easier editing  the HTML field in the article editor is now the full width of your display       Salesforce Knowledge article URLs within communities have changed  Reset any community article links or bookmarks  you saved before Winter  13     API Access Article Type    Using the API  developers now have programmatic access to article type in both the master and translated versions  This access    allows developers to run reports on specific article versions  In Winter    13  the following field has been added to the  KnowledgeArticleVersion object     ArticleType Indicates the API Name of the article type  The    ArticleType is assigned to the article when it s created  You  can t change the value of this field  This field is available in  API version 26 0 and later       am   Note  These fields appear on the article object  For example if you have an article type called FAQ  the article object    with the field is  FAQ_ kav   _    81    Salesforce Knowledge Mail Merge Template Available for Articles    Mail Merge Template Available for Art
205. mponent gt     You don   t need to declare the specific data types for the map collection contents  it will be determined at runtime     Dynamic References to Lists and Maps with  lt apex  inputText gt     Use dynamic references to lists and maps in an  lt apex  inputText gt  tag to create forms using data that isn   t in your  organization   s custom objects  Working with a single map can be much simpler than creating a series of instance variables in  an Apex controller or creating a custom object just for the form data     200    Developer Console Enhancements Additional Visualforce Enhancements    Here   s a Visualforce page that uses a map to hold form data for processing by a custom controller      lt apex page controller  ListsMapsController  gt    lt apex outputPanel id  box  layout  block  gt    lt apex pageMessages  gt    lt apex form  gt      lt apex repeat value    inputFields   var  fieldKey  gt    lt apex outputText value    fieldKey    gt     lt apex inputText value     inputFields fieldKey      gt  lt br  gt    lt  apex repeat gt      lt apex commandButton action    submitFieldData    value  Submit  id  button  rerender  box   gt      lt  apex form gt    lt  apex outputPanel gt    lt  apex page gt     And here   s a simple controller that works with the form     public class ListsMapsController    public Map lt String  String gt  inputFields   get  set       public ListsMapsController      inputFields   new Map lt String  String gt      firstName    gt   Jonny
206. multiple contacts to a task   You can   t create recurring tasks or change the details for recurring tasks   Spell checking the Comments fields isn   t available    You can   t add attachments    You can   t send notification emails     You can   t set task reminders     SSR   PS ER   RIE IES    AAS   AIS IATA S    Lookup Fields Enhanced lookups aren t supported  so you can t use wildcards in lookup searches  and you can t sort  filter  and page through search results     s    lt     Dependent lookups aren t supported     Lookup filters aren t respected  so lookup search results aren t restricted in any  way  You may wind up selecting an item that isn t valid for your organization   resulting in an error message when you save your record     Phone Number Salesforce Touch doesn   t apply any formatting to numbers entered in phone  Fields number fields  so if you enter 4155551212  that   s how the phone number is  displayed when you view the record     Picklist Fields   Controlling and dependent picklists are supported  but Salesforce Touch doesn   t  display indicators on create and edit pages for these fields  To determine if a picklist  field is dependent  and which picklist field controls it  switch to the full site        Text Area Fields Text area fields aren   t scrollable in this release  To access text that isn   t visible in y y  the field  tap the field to display the keyboard  then touch and hold to bring up    97    Mobile Salesforce Mobile SDK       the magnifying
207. n 26 0 to enable this feature     HTML Comments and IE Conditional Comments    Visualforce removes most HTML and XML comments from the page before rendering  without processing their contents   Internet Explorer conditional comments  however  wi   be rendered  allowing you to include IE specific resources and meta  tags     Internet Explorer conditional comments are most commonly used to address browser compatibility issues  generally with older  versions of IE  Although conditional comments work wherever they are used on the page  they are frequently placed inside  the page   s  lt head gt  tags  where they can be used to include version specific stylesheets or JavaScript compatibility    shims        To place conditional comments inside a page   s  lt head gt  tag  disable the standard Salesforce header  sidebar  and stylesheets   and add your own  lt head gt  and  lt body gt  tags      lt apex page docType  html1 5 0  showHeader  false  standardStylesheets  false  gt    lt head gt    lt     Base styles    gt    lt apex stylesheet value    URLFOR SResource BrowserCompatibility   css style css       gt               lt le Iie ia 7S   lt script type  text javascript   src    URLFOR  SResource BrowserCompatibility   js obsolete ie shim js     gt   Sj Seieijone gt        198    Developer Console Enhancements Additional Visualforce Enhancements        lt link rel  stylesheet  type  text css     href     URLFOR  Resource BrowserCompatibility   css ie old styles css       gt   Men
208. n create different page layouts to display Questions       By adding custom buttons and links to the Questions detail page  you can add external URLs and access to applications  and other modules     See    Customizing Page Layouts    and    Understanding Buttons and Links    in the online help     Format Text and Add Photos to Questions    Available in  Enterprise and Unlimited Editions    In Winter    13  administrators can give community members access to a rich text editor  enabling them to format text and add  images when posting questions  Images can be up to 32 KB in size     71    Ideas API Access to Names and Photos from the Feed    API Access to Names and Photos from the Feed    Available in  Enterprise and Unlimited Editions    Using the API  developers have programmatic access to a portal user   s first and last name  profile photo  and thumbnail photo  from the feed  enabling them to create a customized view of feed items  In Winter 13  the following fields have been added  to the Case  CaseComments  Question  and Reply objects     CreatorFullPhotoUrl URL of the user   s profile photo from the feed  Chatter  Answers must be enabled to view this field     CreatorName Name of the user who posted the question or reply  Only the    first name of internal users  agents  appears to portal users in  the feed  Chatter Answers must be enabled to view this field     CreatorSmallPhotoUrl URL of the user   s thumbnail photo from the feed  Chatter  Answers must be enabled to 
209. n properties  As of version 26 0  all responses are identical in both the JSON and XML versions        The FeedItem response body event property     The Comment response body isDeletable property    New and Changed Request Bodies      The File Input request body incorrectly listed the description parameter  The correct name of the parameter is desc      Feed Poll is a new input body for voting on polls      In the Feed Item Input request body  the attachment property now takes a new input body  Attachment Input  Feed  Poll  for creating a new poll associated with the feed item  Note that the Feed Item body property is used for the poll  question in these feed items     38    SALES    FORECASTS ENHANCEMENTS    Use Chatter People Hovers  Rep Hovers     Available in  Professional  Enterprise  Unlimited  and Developer Editions    To use Forecasts     Allow Forecasting          To enable Chatter     Customize Application       2m   Note  This information applies to the Forecasts product beginning with the Winter    12 release and not to Customizable  Forecasts     Now you can use Chatter to connect with your colleagues right from within your forecast with Rep Hovers on Forecasts  Users  must have Chatter enabled and be forecast managers to use this functionality        9  Jump to     Gordon Johnson Forecast    Quota  Tot Renee Moreau  Sales Manager  ec      W Following  S Send a message    F   Renee Moreau Details  gt                 a  1  Hover over a subordinate   s name  A     
210. nal cost in  Unlimited Edition    Danem Clean available in  Developer  Enterprise  and Professional Editions    Data com Clean available for an additional cost in  Unlimited Edition    To add Data com contacts as leads     Create    on leads       Need leads  Get them from Data com  First search for contacts  then add the contacts you want to Salesforce as leads  Records  you ve already added from Data com     won t be added again unless the record has been deleted from Salesforce or your  organization allows duplicates     If you use Data com Premium  when you add a lead from Data com  a corresponding D amp B Company record  if one exists in  Data com  is automatically created in Salesforce and linked to the lead record via its D amp B Company field     1  Search for contacts   2  Select the contacts you want to add and click Add to Salesforce   3  Select Leads to add the records as leads and click Continue   a  Note  If one or more records can   t be added to Salesforce because of errors  we ll notify you and provide a  csv file  with the error details   i    4  Click Go to Leads to view the list of new records on the Leads home page     114    Data com Clean Data com Clean User Features and Enhancements    Cleaning Records Manually With Data com Clean    Data com available in  Contact Manager  Developer  Enterprise  Group  and Professional Editions    Data com available for an additional cost in  Unlimited Edition    Data com Clean available in  Developer  Enterprise  and 
211. nd leads        Data com Premium   Data com Clean  Product  Prevent Data com Clean  auto updates for account  contact  and  lead records     Data com Clean product  The  Data com Clean product is now       automatically enabled     Data com Clean product  Our  definition of Inactive now includes   the D amp B designation of      non marketable           Data com Corporate and Premium   Clean is automatically enabled for  Data com Corporate and Premium    15    Summary of Winter 13 Features and Impact on Salesforce Users     Data com Premium  D amp B Companies  for Leads GA        Data com Premium  Set up D amp B  Companies for leads        Data com Premium   Data com Clean    Product  Set Up D amp B Company Clean    jobs     Data com Premium  Get D amp B  Company records  if available  when you  add Data com contacts as leads     Data com Premium  Get D amp B  Company records  if available  when you       clean leads        Data com Premium  Find and add  Data com Accounts by Global Ultimate  D U N S Number       Site com Enhancements    Page Breadcrumbs       Updated Menu Source Options       Page Visibility in Menus and  Breadcrumbs    Site Map Links       i       Cascading Editability    i    Default Content in Editable Page  Elements    K    16    Force com Enhancements    Improved Linking in Data Elements    New Status Column       Nested Templates    Renamed    Child  Templates       Repeaters and Repeater Elements  Renamed       Force com Enhancements    Permission Set
212. nd leads that maintain profile pictures on those sites     3  Additional contacts and leads from your users    emails appear  which your users can select to display contact and lead details  along with related activities and opportunities     Considerations for Using the Salesforce Side Panel    It   s important that you understand the following details before you enable the side panel for your users       When you enable the Salesforce Side Panel  the Add Emails button no longer appears directly in Outlook  Instead  your    users can click to add emails to either one contact and one account or opportunity  or one lead only     49    Salesforce for Outlook Enhancements Viewing Your Salesforce World in Microsoft   Outlook     Beta    In addition  the Send and Add button no longer appears in individual Outlook emails that your users send  For this beta  release  we don   t offer a Send and Add feature       Supported browsers include Microsoft Internet Explorer    8 or later     The DELETE function in the search box is inactive  To modify search entries  users can either press BACKSPACE  or  click Done and then search again     Enabling the Salesforce Side Panel    1  Click Your Name  gt  Setup  gt  Desktop Administration  gt  Outlook Configurations   2  Either create a new Outlook configuration  or edit an existing one   3  Select Side Panel        Data Settings    TE Overwrite configuration changes made by users    Email            When you select Side Panel and Add Email  th
213. ng navigation menus for site pages     Use Other Map has been renamed to Landing Pages to better identify which pages it refers to     We also added two new options that let you choose from a wider array of site pages for your menu     Child Pages   Create a menu using the child pages of the current page   Sibling Pages   Create a menu using all the pages that share the same parent as the current page     Page Visibility in Menus and Breadcrumbs    Available for purchase in  Enterprise and Unlimited Editions    Available  with limitations  in  Developer Edition       In Winter 13 we added a new checkbox to help you customize your navigation elements  You can hide a page in menus   breadcrumbs  and the site map by selecting the Hide Page checkbox found on the Properties pane for each page  This setting  also prevents website visitors from accessing the page   s direct URL  By default  all pages are visible     127    Site com Site Map Links    Site Map Links    Available for purchase in  Enterprise and Unlimited Editions    Available  with limitations  in  Developer Edition       Now pages aren   t the only things you can assign to your site map  Add internal or external URLs to your site map to customize  your navigation menus and breadcrumbs  To create a site map link  click New in the Site Pages view on the Overview tab and  select Site Map Link  Give it a name  type in a URL  and you re off     Site map links are automatically included in navigation menus and breadcrumbs  
214. nique are encouraged to change their pages to use true IE  conditional comments now that they are supported     Inline Editing for Dependent Picklists    You asked for it  This enhancement is from an idea on the IdeaExchange     Dependent picklists support inline editing  To enable inline editing on the controlling or dependent  lt apex outputField gt    add an  lt apex  inlineEditSupport gt  child component to the field         lt apex  form gt    lt apex outputField value    Location country   gt    lt apex inlineEditSupport event  ondb1Click    gt    lt  apex outputField gt    lt apex outputField value    Location state   gt    lt apex inlineEditSupport event  ondb1lClick    gt    lt  apex outputField gt    lt apex outputField value    Location city   gt    lt apex inlineEditSupport event  ondb1Click    gt    lt  apex outputField gt    lt  apex form gt        199    Developer Console Enhancements Additional Visualforce Enhancements    Pages must include the controlling field for a dependent picklist that is inline edit enabled  Failing to include the controlling  field on the page causes a runtime error when the page is displayed     If you combine inline edit enabled dependent picklists with Ajax style partial page refreshes  refresh all fields with dependent  or controlling relationships to each other as one group  Refreshing fields individually isn   t recommended  and might result in  inconsistent undo redo behavior  Here   s an example of the recommended way to partia
215. nization has divisions enabled  select this option to enable the custom object for divisions  Divisions group  records for simplified search results  list views  reports  and other areas within Salesforce  Salesforce adds a Division  field to the custom object  and if the custom object is the master in a master detail relationship  any custom objects on  the detail side also get the Division field and inherit their division from the master record    Available for Customer Portal  This option makes the custom object available through the Salesforce Customer Portal     Security Enhancements    Available in  All Editions    Winter    13 introduces several new features that enhance security     Auth Providers Detect and Link to Existing Users    The createUser method for the Auth  RegistrationHandler class is now able to return existing users as well as  new users  It   s no longer mandatory to create a new user when createUser is called  The single sign on flow creates  the link between the third party identity and the returned user  then logs the user in     Updated OAuth 2 0 Bearer Assertion Request    Prior to Winter 13  when you requested a new access token with JWT or SAML in an OAuth bearer assertion request   all your previous approvals containing a refresh token were examined  If a matching approval was found  a new access  token was issued with the most recent matching approval   s scopes  If no prior approvals included a refresh token  no  approved scopes were availabl
216. nts    and    Data  Repeaters     respectively     130    FORCE COM    Geolocation Custom Field   Beta    Available in  All Editions       To create or change custom fields     Customize Application       The geolocation custom field allows you to create a field that identifies a location by its latitude and longitude  You can then  use the geolocation field with the DISTANCE and GEOLOCATION formula functions to calculate distances between  locations  For example  you can calculate the distance between two geolocation fields  such as between the warehouse and the  store   or between a geolocation field and any fixed latitude longitude coordinates  such as between the warehouse and 37 775         122 418    also known as San Francisco      gm Note  This is a beta release of geolocation and its functionality has known limitations  outlined here  To provide  feedback on geolocation  go to _IdeaExchange     Geolocation Field Limitations    Geolocation is a compound field that counts toward your organization   s limits as three custom fields  one for latitude  one for  longitude  and one for internal use  In this beta release  support for the compound field  geolocation  vs  the field   s components   latitude and longitude  varies depending on the functionality youre using in Salesforce  For example  you can create list views  that show the field and its components  but you can   t select the compound geolocation field in Apex  you can only run SOQL  queries on a geolocation fiel
217. ny Chatter API resources    have been exposed and are directly accessible using Connect in Apex  The Connect in Apex documentation is available in the  Chatter REST API Developer s Guide     3 Note  Connect in Apex is currently available through a pilot program  For information on enabling Connect in Apex   please contact your salesforce com representative     New and Changed Resources      The Bookmarks Resources topic contained an incorrect example of the Feed Items resource  The correct example is    chatter feed items 0D5D0000000IT r6zKAC isBookmarkedByCurrentUser true       The new Connect resource returns the list of available resources for the organization     The new Communities resources return information about all communities  or the specified community       The new Feed Items  Feed Poll resource returns information about a feed poll associated with a specific feed item  It can  also be used to vote in a poll       The new Files Information  Batch resource returns file information for a list of file IDs     The Files resource now accepts the following HTTP methods        DELETE     PATCH    In addition  PATCH has a new parameter  title  used to rename an existing file     The Flat feed resource is no longer available for all feeds       The Is Modified resource is now available  Use this resource to poll a news feed to see if it   s been updated or changed since  the specified time and date   chatter feeds news me is modified    3  Note  Though the Is Modified res
218. o populate the test accounts      isTest  private class DataUtil    static testmethod void testLoadData         Load the test accounts from the static resource  List lt sObject gt  ls   Test loadData Account sObjectType   testAccounts        Verify that all 3 test accounts were created  System assert ls size      3         Get first test account  Account al    Account 1s 0    String acctName   al Name   System debug  acctName             Perform some testing using the test records    Global Interface Method Implementations No Longer Need to Be Global    When you implement methods of a global interface  you can declare those methods as public or global in your class  You re  no longer required to declare them as global  This gives you a choice of how much visibility you would like your method  implementations to have  If you   re a package developer  you can include an interface implementation in a package and make  it inaccessible to the subscriber   s org by declaring the class and methods as public  For example  the package can include a  public batch implementation class with public methods that isn   t visible to the subscriber     This also applies to overriding global class methods  The methods overriding global methods can be declared as public or  global     182    Developer Console Enhancements Apex Code Enhancements    This first example shows that global interface methods can be implemented as public methods  The interface is listed first   followed by the class th
219. ok then automatically adds another group  of occurrences  bringing the total future occurrences up to 100 again  The schedule on which  Salesforce adds these groups depends on the number of occurrences that passed and when users  last synced  as well as whether users changed any existing occurrences     In addition  when users set up recurring events in Outlook  they must select the option End by   Salesforce doesn   t support recurring series set with the following options     e Noend date    End after    Monthly occurrences Salesforce for Outlook doesn   t support the following Outlook recurrence pattern options       weekend day    weekday    Yearly occurrences Salesforce for Outlook lets your users set up events that recur every year  If users enter a number  other than 1 for the Recur every option in Outlook recurrence patterns  Salesforce for Outlook  won t sync the recurring series  This mean that your users can set up yearly recurrences  but not  recurrences for every other year or every three years     In addition  Salesforce for Outlook doesn   t support the following Outlook recurrence pattern  options       weekend day    weekday    Events lasting longer Salesforce doesn   t support recurring events lasting longer than 24 hours   than 24 hours    52    Salesforce for Outlook Enhancements Syncing Recurring Events    Updates to events Salesforce doesn   t notify attendees of meeting updates through email  Instead   Salesforce for Outlook updates attendees    Salesfo
220. ollers or Apex     Author Apex       Visualforce includes the following enhancements in Winter 13  For detailed information on these enhancements  refer to the  Visualforce Developer s Guide     support caseFeed Component    The new support  caseFeed component includes all of the standard Case Feed page elements  the Email  Portal  Log a  Call  and Write Case Note publishers  case activity feed  feed filters  and highlights panel  You can use this component to  create a version of the standard Case Feed page for certain users if your organization also wants to use Visualforce to create a  customized Case Feed page for other users     For example  a company might want to create a highly customized Case Feed page that   s tailored for field support agents using  mobile devices while still allowing support agents in the contact center to use the standard Case Feed page  The company  would create two Visualforce pages  one that uses support   caseFeed  assigned to agents working with desktop computers  in the contact center  and one that uses a custom combination of other Case Feed components  assigned to field agents     support  caseFeed can only be used in organizations that have enabled Case Feed  Chatter  and feed tracking on cases     For more information on using support   caseFeed and the other Case Feed components  see Customizing Case Feed with    Visualforce     195    Developer Console Enhancements Additional Visualforce Enhancements    NoSignIn Option for Chatter Ans
221. om   Find Contacts Q Find Accounts    CERET Company or Website i Location i    No saved searches   2  United States  California       Industry     2  Software  amp  Internet  Computers         Search   Reset Search    Add to Salesforce w Export Results v Save Search 26 50of117625   lt   lt  Page 2 of4705  gt   gt      Name City State Country Location Type Active Contacts    Updated  FILTERS Expand All  Collapse All   Paypal Inc San Jose CA United States Headquarters 857 Last 6 Months     Options paypal com    1 877 672 9725    Show Inactive Records  Seagate Technology LLC Cupertino United States Headquarters Last 6 Months    www sagate com    Employees i  1 408 658 1000    Min to Max Xilinx  Inc  San Jose United States Headquarters Last 6 Months  www xilinx com    1 408 559 7778      Revenue  USD  i y    Twentieth Century Fox Film C Los Angeles United States Headquarters Last 6 Months  Min to Max wwwfoxmovies com   1 310 369 1000       Location Type Polycom  Inc  Pleasanton United States Headquarters Last 6 Months    F  Branch www polycom com     1 925 924 6000   Headquarters   PC Mall  Inc  Torrance United States Headquarters 6 Last 6 Months  www pemall com    1 310 354 5600    E  Single Location      Ownershij  p Sanmina SCI Corporation San Jose United States Headquarters 6 Last 6 Months    E Public www sanmina com    Private  1 408 964 3500    E Government Applied Materials  Inc  Santa Clara United States Headquarters Last 6 Months    Other www appliedmaterials com   1 408
222. om object  while keeping the  object and its metadata intact for future use  Truncating is useful  for example  if you have created a custom object and filled  it with test records  When you re done with the test data  you can truncate the object to purge the test records  but keep the  object and put it into production  This is much faster than batch deleting records and possibly recreating the object     Truncating custom objects requires that you enable an organizational permission     a Note  You must turn on the truncate organization permission even if you had access to truncation in the pilot release     z    211    Additional Force com Enhancements Retention Policy for Unused Sandboxes    1  Click Your Name  gt  Setup  gt  Customize  gt  User Interface        2  Select Enable Custom Object Truncate     Truncating custom objects causes some irreversible changes to the truncated object and its records  After enabling the truncate  permission  make sure you fully understand the implications of truncation before you use the feature  See    Truncating Custom  Objects Overview    in the online help for more information     Retention Policy for Unused Sandboxes    Available in  Enterprise  Unlimited  and Database com Editions    With Winter 13  sandboxes that no one has logged into for 180 days are now deleted  Users who have created or most recently  refreshed any sandbox for your organization will be notified prior to scheduling the sandbox for deletion  They will get at le
223. om solution  D amp B gives users integrated access to its trusted global database of millions of  companies and corporate structures  and over 70 fields of company information  such as D U N S Number and NAICS  industry codes  directly in Salesforce     D amp B Companies is available to organizations that purchase Data com Premium  Here   s how it works     When you add an account or lead from Data com  a corresponding D amp B Company record is automatically created and linked  to that record via its D amp B Company field  Just click the link to open the D amp B Company record and view the rich set of D amp B  data  including a Company Description field  plus sections like Primary Data and Firmographic Data  If the D amp B Company  record is linked to an account  the Accounts related list on the page links back to the account record     For example  if you add an account record for Starbucks  when you open its record  the D amp B Company field value is Starbucks  Corporation  The value is underlined to identify it as a link  Just click the link to open the Starbucks Corporation D amp B  Company record     For accounts and leads not added from Data com  those created manually  for example   if a corresponding D amp B Company  record exists  it is added to Salesforce and linked to the account or lead record the first time that record is cleaned     If your company also uses the Data com Clean product  you can use automated jobs to update your D amp B Company records     117    
224. on  This query now returns a single row containing 0  Note that this doesn   t apply to COUNT    when used  without a field name  Also  queries using aggregate functions other than COUNT  fieldName    such as MAX      returned an  empty result set in some rare cases when no rows matched the filtering condition  This query now returns a single row containing  null     SOSL Enhancements  Use the Salesforce Object Search Language  SOSL  to perform text searches using Salesforce APIs     SOSL Query Limits    The SOSL statement character limit is now tied to the SOQL statement character limit defined for your organization  By  default  SOQL and SOSL queries cannot exceed 10 000 characters  However  if your organization is participating in the pilot  program that allows a higher SOQL query length limit of up to 20 000 characters  the raised SOQL limit applies to SOSL  queries as well  For a full description of the SOSL query syntax  see the Force com SOQL and SOSL Reference     SOAP API Enhancements  New Calls  These calls are new in API version 26 0       describeSearchScopeOrder     Use this call to retrieve an ordered list of objects in the global search scope of  a logged in user  The returned list reflects the object order in the user   s default search scope  and does not account  for any pinned objects on the user   s search results page  This call is useful if you want to implement a custom search  results page using the optimized global search scope  You must enable Chatte
225. onfigurations       For all other errors  contact your system administrator  who may need to contact Support     2  After the errors have been resolved  try again to add the Data com records to Salesforce     Improved Data com Reports AppExchange Package    There have been several improvements to the Data com Reports AppExchange Package  including modifications to a number  of reports in order to provide more useful data  Also  numerous report names have been changed slightly to better align with  the data in the report  For a comprehensive list of the entire Data com Reports AppExchange Package  see    Using Data com  Reports and Dashboards    in the Salesforce online help     Search by D U N S Number    You can now search Salesforce by D U N S Number  Just enter the 9 digit D U N S Number in the global search box and  your search results will return any accounts or leads with that D U N S Number     DATA COM CLEAN    Data com Clean Administrator Features and Enhancements    Winter    13 offers powerful new Clean features and ehnahcements     If you use Data com Premium and the Data com Clean product  you can now set up clean jobs to automatically update  D amp B Company records linked to accounts and leads      You can also map Data com fields to Salesforce account  contact  and lead fields  When you export or clean records  put  Data com values in the Salesforce fields where you want them      We now offer field level Clean settings for your accounts  contacts  and leads  
226. or callouts made via the HTTP classes     The new Test  setMock method instructs the Apex runtime to handle callouts in test methods and to generate a mock  response that you specify     Testing HTTP Callouts    To deploy or package Apex  75  of your code must have test coverage  By default  test methods don   t support HTTP callouts  and tests that perform callouts are skipped  However  you can enable HTTP callout testing by instructing Apex to generate  mock responses in tests by calling Test   setMock and by specifying the mock response in one of the following ways       By implementing the HttpCalloutMock interface    By using Static Resources with StaticResourceCalloutMock or MultiStaticResourceCalloutMock    171    Developer Console Enhancements Apex Code Enhancements    Testing HTTP Callouts by Implementing the Ht tpCalloutMock Interface    Provide an implementation for the HttpCalloutMock interface to specify the response sent in the respond method  which  the Apex runtime calls to send a response for a callout     global class YourHttpCalloutMockImpl implements HttpCalloutMock    global HTTPResponse respond HTTPRequest req        Create a fake respons     Set response values  and     return response        wa   Note       The class that implements the HttpCalloutMock interface can be either global or public       You can annotate this class with  isTest since it will be used only in test context  In this way  you can exclude  it from your organization   s code size l
227. or iPhone and iPad   Version 2 4 Generally  Available    Chatter for iPhone and iPad v2 4 is now generally available  This release includes several enhancements to the Chatter mobile  app   Sharing Posts   With the latest version of Chatter for iOS  you can share public Chatter posts to your profile     To share a post   1  In your feed  tap the post you want to share     rm ol  2  Tap   at    3  Tap Share to my profile     Comments     Like    and File Sharing    This release makes it easier to collaborate from the mobile app by providing two new features for comments  You can  now     e Like comments       Attach files and photos to comments  The process for adding files and photos to comments is exactly the same as  adding them to posts     Dashboard Snapshots  In this version of Chatter for iOS  you can view dashboard snapshots in your feed     For more information about using Chatter on your device  open the Chatter mobile app on your iPhone or iPad  then tap  Settings  gt  Help     Installing the App    Salesforce Chatter is available for download in the Apple App Store  To use the Chatter for iOS v2 4 mobile app  your iPhone  or iPad must be running iOS 5 0 or higher  and it must be connected to a WiFi or cellular network     99    Chatter for iPhone and iPad     Version 2 4 Generally Available    Mobile    Upgrading the App  You can upgrade to the latest version of Chatter for iOS by installing the pending update that appears in the App Store on  your iPhone or iPad  
228. ore you can search a log  you must execute Apex statements to generate a log     1  To open the Developer Console Command Line Window  choose Your Name  gt  Developer Console and press CTRL L   2  To execute Apex code and generate a log  do one of the following       To enter Apex statements at the command line  type exec  lt Apex statements gt      For example  type     exec List lt Account gt  accts   new List lt Account gt      for  Integer i 0  i lt 20  itt      Account a   new Account  name  Account Name     i    accts add a             To execute code that already exists in the Execute Apex Code window  type exec  r     3  To search for text in the debug log  type find  lt string gt    For example  type find Account Name     View the search results in the command line window   4  To close the command line  press CTRL L     Navigating through Views      To move left and right through views in a workspace  click the view   s tab or use these shortcuts        Left   CTRL Page Up     Right   CTRL Page Down    Viewing Keyboard Shortcuts    To see a list of Developer Console keyboard shortcuts  press CTRL SHIFT       Resuming Updates to the Developer Console    After twenty minutes of inactivity  the Developer Console stops polling for new logs  test runs  and heap dumps       To resume updating the Developer Console  click Resume Updates in the global toolbar of the Developer Console     156    Developer Console Enhancements Force com IDE Enhancements    Force com IDE Enhanc
229. ortunity teams  You must also delete any custom reports that include opportunity team information and uninstall  any Apex packages that use opportunity teams    2  Click Your Name  gt  Setup  gt  Customize  gt  Opportunities  gt  Opportunity Teams    Click Settings    4  Select Disable Team Selling and click Save     ag    45    Opportunity Teams Enhancements Using Opportunity Teams    5  Select Yes at the prompt and click OK  All opportunity teams assigned to opportunities and all default opportunity teams  are permanently deleted     a     Note  You can   t disable team selling for your organization if team members are referenced in Apex  For example   if Apex code references the Team Member field  represented as OpportunityTeamMember in the code   team    1 selling cannot be disabled  See Apex Code Overview     Editing Multi Line Layouts for Opportunity Teams    Available in  Professional  Enterprise  Unlimited  and Developer Editions       To edit multi line layouts for opportunity teams     Customize Application       You can specify which fields appear on the Opportunity Team Member multi line page  To view this page  add a new member  to an opportunity team     Click Your Name  gt  Setup  gt  Customize  gt  Opportunities  gt  Opportunity Teams  gt  Page Layouts   Next to the name of an opportunity team page layout  click Edit    Click Edit Multi Line Layout in the top right corner    Move fields between Available Fields and Selected Fields       a E      To customize w
230. ose users may not otherwise have  access      All contacts related to an event on the event detail page if the administrator has added the Name related list to the event  page layout      The number of contacts related to an event when the Relation Count column is included in activity reports      One row per contact for each activity in the Activities with Contacts report when the user selects at least one field from  the related contact list      An activity   s primary contact in two reports  Tasks and Events  and Activities with Cases  The primary contact also appears  in the Name field on the event detail page       Note      __  The Activities with Contacts report displays all contacts related to an activity but doesn   t indicate which is the  primary contact     56    Shared Activities Enhancements Known Issue Involving API and Email Integration Compatibility    Known Issue Involving API and Email Integration  Compatibility    Available in  All Editions except Database com     To view activity settings     View Setup and Configuration     a P gu       To customize activity settings     Customize Application       Before you enable Shared Activities  it   s important you understand an issue that may impact administrators or developers using  our API version 25 0 or earlier  as well as users of two Salesforce email integration applications     Administrator or API version 25 0 or earlier The API doesn   t return events with multiple contacts related to  Developer the ev
231. ot connected  measurements on a linear grid     193    Developer Console Enhancements Visualforce Charting   Generally Available                     T       2                 T T  50 58    Torque       Area charts are plotted on the same rectangular grid as the other linear data series charts  You can combine multiple   lt apex areaSeries gt    lt apex barSeries gt    lt apex lineSeries gt   and  lt apex scatterSeries gt  charts in the same    chart     See the Visualforce Developer s Guide for complete details about scatter charts     Additional Charting Improvements    The default color scheme for Visualforce charts has been revised to better match the colors of the Salesforce reporting and  analytics charts  The new color scheme makes it easier to create visually consistent dashboards     In addition to the new default color scheme  most charting components support a colorSet attribute  Use this attribute to  control the colors in charts and data series  Add HTML style  hexadecimal  colors to the attribute  and the component cycles    through them for each element  For example         lt apex barSeries orientation  vertical  axis  left  xField  name  yField  datal   colorSet   000000   FF0000   00FF00   0000FF   FFFFOO   00FFFF   FFOOFE   colorsProgressWithinSeries  true   gt           Most chart types have additional style customization options available through a data series component  See the Visualforce  Developer s Guide for details of each chart   s options     Visua
232. ource is generally available  your organization may not have permission to use  it automatically  If you can   t access this resource  contact your salesforce com representative and ask about the     Enabled Chatter Feed Polling    permission       The Users resource now returns recommendations for a specific action and key prefix     The News  Record  To  and User Profile Feed Items resources all have the following new POST request parameters     36    Additional Chatter Enhancements Chatter REST API Enhancements    0 isBookMarkedByCurrentUser parameter with POST to specify whether the new feed item should be bookmarked   0 pollChoicel through pollChoice10   The choices used to create a new feed item with a poll      visibility parameter with POST to specify who can see the feed item     am     Note  With Record Feed Item resources  you can set visibility to InternalUser for records that are  not groups or users  At this time  for all other feed item resources  you can only set visibility toAllUsers       The documentation incorrectly specified the return for the User Groups resource  The correct return is the User Groups  page response body     New and Changed Response Bodies      The Group Member response body incorrectly stated that the value of the id property was a user ID  The correct value  of the id property is a group membership ID      The result property on the Batch Result Item response body now returns File response bodies for the resource   chatter files batch 
233. overlay  the Field Settings tab provides an edit option      for each choice     You can now expand and collapse Palette sections and drop down menu sections by clicking anywhere in the section  header  Previously  you had to click the arrowhead to expand or collapse a section       You can use the keyboard to navigate drop down menus        Use the RIGHT ARROW and LEFT ARROW to expand and collapse sections      Use the UP ARROW and DOWN ARROW to move up and down in a menu   0 Press RETURN to select the highlighted item in a menu     Selected elements on the canvas now have a green border and no special shading  Previously  selected elements were shaded  blue       Selected connectors are now green  Previously  selected connectors were colored red     Merge Fields in Help Text and User Input Validation  Messages    Available in  Enterprise  Unlimited  and Developer Editions    You can now use merge fields in help text for screens and user input fields  In the Cloud Flow Designer  the help text editor  includes a drop down menu for selecting merge fields     Merge fields now also work correctly in error messages for user input validation  If you added merge fields to error messages  for user input validation in Summer 712  API version 25 0  or earlier releases  open and save the flows in the Winter 13 Cloud  Flow Designer to enable the merge fields to work correctly at runtime     Desktop Flow Designer No Longer Supports New API  Versions    The desktop Flow Designer supports 
234. ownloadable and mobile browser apps  users can access either version of Salesforce Touch  interchangeably     Accessing Salesforce Touch    The way users access Salesforce Touch depends on the versions that you ve enabled for your organization       Salesforce Touch Downloadable App  If you opt to keep the downloadable version of Salesforce Touch enabled  users  can download and install the app from the Apple App Store or AppExchange Mobile  Once installed  they can launch the  app from the iPad Home screen and log in to their Salesforce accounts as they would normally  By default  the downloadable  app connects to your production environment           Note  Ifyou disable the downloadable version of Salesforce Touch  your users aren   t blocked from downloading  or installing the app  Any attempts to log in to Salesforce from the app  however  will fail with an error message       Salesforce Touch Mobile Browser App  If you enable the mobile browser version of Salesforce Touch  users simply access  the mobile browser app by logging in to their Salesforce accounts from the Safari web browser  Login sessions from iPad  devices are automatically redirected to the mobile browser app            Note  Ifa user sees the full site instead of the mobile browser app  verify that the Touch User checkbox in the  user   s Personal Information settings is selected  You can access this information by selecting Your Name  gt  Setup   gt  Manage Users  gt  Users  then clicking Edit next to th
235. ox  automated jobs will not run for objects of that type      3  For each object you ve enabled  select your clean preference       Flag all differences per record to only identify fields whose values are different from Data com values     Flag differences and auto fill blank fields to identify fields whose values are different and fiX blank  fields with values from Data com    e Customize settings field by field     4  Ifyou select the Customize option for any object  you can select either Flag or Flag  amp  Auto Fill for individual  fields   5  Ifyou want to clean D amp B Company records  select the Enable Clean jobs for D amp B Companies checkbox        6  When you finish setting clean preferences for all the objects you want to clean  click Save     119    D amp B Companies D amp B Companies User Features and Enhancements    D amp B Companies User Features and Enhancements    Here are the new user features for D amp B Companies       With Data com Corporate and Premium products  get D amp B Company fields on lead records  With Premium  get a linked  D amp B Company record  if available  when you add or clean a lead record        When you convert a lead  D amp B Company data is transferred to the account and lead records that are created       Ifyou use Data com Premium  search Data com by Global Ultimate D U N S Number to see a list of accounts within  an organization   s corporate structure and then add those records to Salesforce     Asem Files Accounts Contacts Leads R
236. pages  you can create custom publishers that offer agents more functionality     Here are some examples of custom publishers       A Case Comment publisher that lets agents write comments on cases longer than the standard 1000 characters for case  notes       A Task publisher that lets agents create tasks related to a case       An Entitlements publisher that shows the service level agreement  SLA  status   such as past due  on time  or time to  milestone   on a case and lets agents mark milestones as complete     You can use any Visualforce page that uses the standard case controller as a custom publisher     For more information on creating Visualforce pages to use as custom publishers  see Customizing Case Feed with Visualforce     62    Case Feed Enhancements New Feed Items Available in Case Feed    New Feed Items Available in Case Feed    Available in  Enterprise  Unlimited  and Developer Editions    Winter    13 introduces two new kinds of feed items in Case Feed       Live Agent transcripts   The transcript for each Live Agent chat session associated with a case appears in the feed for the  case  The feed item shows basic information about the chat and the first few lines of it  Click More to see more of the chat  directly in the feed  or click View Transcript to see the full transcript record       Social posts   Facebook and Twitter posts associated with a case  such as those created with Salesforce Social Hub  appear  in the feed     To include these items in your f
237. password  Now  if you have SAML enabled  you ll still see the SAML login but also the option to use your user  name and password choice  In addition  if a third party Authentication Provider is enabled  you ll get that choice too   After you deploy your domain  you set your login policy in My Domain Settings     Clickjacking Protection Available    You can enable protection against clickjack attacks  also known as user interface redress attacks  for non setup pages  and your custom Visualforce pages  Setup pages already include protection against clickjack attacks  Click Your Name   gt  Setup  gt  Security Controls  gt  Session Settings to select Enable clickjack protection for non setup          Salesforce pagesandEnable clickjack protection for non setup customer Visualforce pages     It   s possible that pages will either display as a blank page or without the frame if either of these settings is enabled and  either of the following conditions exists     e Your organization displays Salesforce com user interface pages within a frame or iframe       You use custom Visualforce pages within a frame or iframe     The behavior varies depending on your browser and its version  To ensure that these pages will continue to work correctly  in your organization  discontinue displaying these pages within a frame or iframe     Service Provider Initiated Request Binding    If you re using My Domains  you can chose the binding mechanism your identity provider requests for your SAML  mess
238. pgraded  The  script must perform these tasks     a  For each new permission set  choose an existing component whose user assignment needs to be copied   b  Find all profiles that can access that component   c  Assign the new permission sets to every user with those profiles     sm Note  The default permission sets for all standard profiles aren   t editable  Hence  the post install script will trigger  an exception if it tries to update one of these permission sets  It   s important that you create a new permission set to  assign access to the new components in your package     Sample Post Install Script for a Push Upgrade    This section shows a sample post install script that automates the assignment of new components to existing users of a package   For more information on writing a post install Apex script  see    Running Apex on Package Install Upgrade    in the ISVforce  Guide     The sample script covers a scenario in which an ISV is upgrading subscribers to a new package version that contains new  Visualforce pages and a new permission set that grants access to those pages  After upgrading  existing users of the package  will not have access to the new pages by default  The post install script resolves this problem by identifying which users have  access to the Visualforce pages in the old version of the package and granting them access to the new pages  The script performs  the following actions       Get the Id of the Visualforce pages in the old version of the pac
239. ple        objl and obj2 are instances of MyClass  if  objl    obj2         Do something       if  objl equals obj2         Do something       Sample    This sample shows how to implement the equals and hashCode methods  The class that provides those methods is listed  first  It also contains a constructor that takes two Integers  The second example is a code snippet that creates three objects of  the class  two of which have the same values  Next  map entries are added using the pair objects as keys  The sample verifies  that the map has only two entries since the entry that was added last has the same key as the first entry  and hence  overwrote  it  The sample then uses the    operator  which works as expected because the class implements equals  Also  some additional  map operations are performed  like checking whether the map contains certain keys  and writing all keys and values to the  debug log  Finally  the sample creates a set and adds the same objects to it  It verifies that the set size is two  since only two  objects out of the three are unique     public class PairNumbers    Integer x y     public PairNumbers  Integer a  Integer b     x a   y b         public Boolean equals Object obj     if  obj instanceof PairNumbers     PairNumbers p    PairNumbers  obj   return   x  p x   amp  amp   y  p y        return false          public Integer hashCode      msjeuien  Sil  s2     we         This code snippet makes use of the PairNumbers class     Map lt PairNumbers  Str
240. ponents and Fields    If the new version of your package includes new components or new fields in existing components  existing users of the package  won t automatically have access to the new components and fields after the upgrade  This can limit them from using the new  features you ve added or prevent older features from working properly  By default  any new components in your package are  assigned only to administrators  You have two options for ensuring that all users of the package have access to the new  components and fields     Notify administrators to assign the appropriate permissions to all users of the package    We recommend this for any new features you re introducing  This ensures administrators have the option of deciding  if and when to make the new features available     204    Developer Console Enhancements Push Major Upgrade    Assign the new components to existing users automatically  using a post install Apex script    We recommend this for enhancements to existing features  This ensures all current users of the package can continue  using it without explicit action by administrators     To assign access to new components automatically  you can use the following strategy     1  Create new permission sets that define the default access settings for all new components and fields    2  Include the new permission sets in the new package version    3  Write a post install Apex script to run automatically in the subscriber organization after the package is u
241. pproval process or has pending workflow  actions  For more information  see    Managing Approval Processes    in the online help and    Managing  Workflow Rules    in the online help     Converting a lead to a person account won   t trigger workflow rules     When a lead is converted by someone who isn t the lead owner  all workflow tasks associated with  the lead that are assigned to that user  except email alerts  are reassigned to the lead owner  Workflow    tasks assigned to users other than the lead owner and lead converter aren t changed        123    D amp B Companies D amp B Companies User Features and Enhancements    Cleaning Records Manually With Data com Clean    Data com available in  Contact Manager  Developer  Enterprise  Group  and Professional Editions    Data com available for an additional cost in  Unlimited Edition    Data com Clean available in  Developer  Enterprise  and Professional Editions    Data com Clean available for an additional cost in  Unlimited Edition    To clean account records     Edit    on accounts  To clean contact records     Edit    on contacts    To clean lead records     Edit    on leads       Use Data com Clean to make sure your CRM records are always up to date     Clean works for a  the account  contact  and lead records you have access to in Salesforce   not just those you previously added  from Data com     If your organization uses Data com Premium and you clean an account or lead record that doesn   t yet have a D amp B Compan
242. prise  Unlimited  and Developer Editions    In Winter 13  customer service agents who are working in case feed can share an article from your public knowledge base or  g 8 your p 8  public chatter answers site with a URL  instead of emailing a large PDF        X v How to Share Articles via URLs    Email article as a PDF  Share article link from Public KB Site  Al Detach from case             To allow your agents to share articles with public links     Click Your Name  gt  Setup  gt  Customize  gt  Knowledge  gt  Settings   Click Edit     Under Case Settings  select Allow users to share articles via public URLs     Pwd    In the Available Sites list  select the sites you want to allow your agents to send URLs from and add them to the  Selected sites list     5  Click Save     From the case feed  agents have the ability to share the article   s link from any of the selected sites     83    Salesforce Knowledge Automatic Knowledge Filtering   Beta    Automatic Knowledge Filtering   Beta    Available in  Enterprise  Unlimited  and Developer Editions    In Winter    13  you can define which articles appear in the Article tab  advanced search  and the article sidebar component  with data category mapping  For example in the figure below  as an agent enters case information  the suggested articles sidebar  is populated with relative articles     Case Edit o  _    Suggested Articles YQ  4 New Case          Case Edit Save Save  amp  Close Save  amp  New New Article Title Most Viewed  
243. quivalent to selecting all of them   2  Select one or more statuses from the Status list  Not selecting any status is equivalent to selecting all of them   3  Click Apply to filter the list  Click Clear to remove all the filters     The history displays the following information  in alphabetical order      208    Developer Console Enhancements Environment Hub   Pilot    While a push upgrade is in progress  you can click Abort to  stop it     Start Date The scheduled start date and time of the push upgrade     Status The status of the push upgrade  whether scheduled  in  progress  completed  aborted  or completed with failures     Target The name of the organization the push upgrade went to  For  multiple organizations  this field only lists the first organization  in the queue  followed by the number of the total selected  organizations  Clicking on this link provides you with more  information about the target push upgrade and each individual  organization     The package version number that was pushed        Environment Hub   Pilot    Available in  Professional  Enterprise  Unlimited  and Developer Editions    om Note  This feature is currently available through a pilot program  For information on enabling it for your organization     please contact salesforce com    e    Starting in Winter    13  you can use the Environment Hub to view details of all your Salesforce organizations from one  central  location  This can make administration much easier  especially for companie
244. r enhancements to the Developer Console     Command Line Window    Winter    13 adds a Command Line Window to the Developer Console  Use the Command Line Window to execute anonymous  Apex code and search the resulting debug log  Usually you work with debug logs in a System Log view  However  at some  points during development  you might want to search the log for a specific term  In this case  use the Command Line Window     Developer Console Command Line Reference    To open the Developer Console Command Line Window  choose Your Name  gt  Developer Console and press CTRL L     To close the Developer Console Command Line Window  press CTRL L     Command Parameters Description  commands None  A list of all commands     exec  lt Apex statements gt   lt Apex statements  gt    One or more Executes the  lt Apex statements gt  and  Apex statements  generates a log     exec   o    r   o  Opens the Execute Anonymous  window      r  Executes the code in the Execute  Anonymous window and generates a log     find  lt string gt   lt string gt    A string of characters  Searches the log for a string     help None  Explains how to get information about  commands     man  lt command gt   lt command gt    A Command Line Displays the description of the command     Window command        155    Developer Console Enhancements Additional Enhancements to the Developer Console    Searching a Debug Log    To search for text in a debug log  use the Command Line Window in the Developer Console     Bef
245. r organizations  by using the search box and entering a term that filters based on an organization   s name or ID  Names can match by partial  string  but IDs must match exactly  From the drop down list  you can also filter based on the status of the push upgrade     The list contains the following information specific to each organization  in alphabetical order      Duration The amount of time the push upgrade took     Failure Type Lists the type of failure that occurred  if any   If the push  upgrade did fail  a possible explanation is provided in the  collapsible section  If the push upgrade was unsuccessful  click  Retry to try it again     Organization ID The ID that uniquely identifies the organization to  salesforce com     Organization Name The name of the organization  Clicking this name shows the  upgrade history for the organization     Start The scheduled start date and time of the push upgrade     Status The status of the push upgrade  whether scheduled  in  progress  completed  aborted  or completed with failures        Viewing Push Upgrade History    To view the details of all push upgrades sent by your organization  click Your Name  gt  Setup  gt  Create  gt  Packages  click the  name of the package you want to view  then click Push Upgrades     The Push Upgrade History page lists the status of all your pending and previous push upgrades  To filter your push upgrade  history     1  Select a version number from the drop down list  Not selecting any version is e
246. r the process for enabling Shared Activities finishes  you ll receive a confirmation email     a gt   Tip  To check the status of the process for enabling Shared Activities  view the Activity Settings page  Salesforce    provides helpful messages about both the status and what you need to do if the enabling process doesn   t finish    successfully     Activity Rollup to Accounts for Contacts    Ifyou create an activity and relate it to an account and a contact  and that contact is related to a different account  the activity  rolls up to the contact   s parent account  For example       The    Sales Rep Call    task is related directly to the Global Media account and also to the contact Ron Dean     Ron Dean   s parent account is HiTech Solutions     The    Sales Rep Call    task appears in the Global Media account details and also in the HiTech Solution account details     a    Note  This behavior occurs only when Shared Activities is enabled     eee    Event and EventAttendee Object Changes    Important changes have been made to the Event and EventAttendee API objects  Now any customer or partner can modify  event attendees with the API  These changes might impact existing Apex and API packages       The EventAttendee object is no longer supported       There is a new EventRelation object with fields to manipulate Whos  Whats  and invitees on events  You can modify  invitees on an event     cm    Note  A Who isa related contact or lead  and a What is a related record     A 
247. r to enable global search     164    Developer Console Enhancements API Enhancements         sendEmailMessage     Use this call to immediately send up to 10 draft email messages  The ID   specified must  target EmailMessage objects whose Status is Draft     Polymorphic Relationship Field Changes   Developer Preview    If your organization has the SOQL Polymorphism feature enabled  polymorphic relationship fields  which were previously  defined as Names  are now defined as sObjects in the Enterprise WSDL  As an example  you could now access the Owner  field on a Merchandise__c custom object directly as an SObject as shown in the following Java snippet     Merchandise c myMerch    Merchandise _c  queryRecord   SObject merchOwner   myMerch getOwner        Cast and access merchOwner as a User or Group depending on owner type       Without the SOQL Polymorphism feature  you would need to access the Owner field as a Name     Merchandise c myMerch    Merchandise _c  queryRecord   Name merchOwner   myMerch getOwner          Use Name information in merchOwner to determine owner type and Id          See SOQL Polymorphism   Developer Preview for more details about SOQL Polymorphism     Chatter API Objects  New Objects    These objects are new in API version 26 0       The HashtagDefinition object represents hashtag     topics in public Chatter posts and comments  Public posts and  comments include those on profiles and in public groups  but not those on records or in private groups     
248. rce calendars immediately        Modifying Recurring Series    Users can modify recurring series  but it   s good to know what to avoid  so that your users won   t lose any details for occurrences  they ve individually modified     Recurring series in Those modifications won   t propagate to individually modified occurrences in Salesforce     Outlook          For example  your user modifies the appointment time of an occurrence  and then later modifies    the appointment time for the entire series  The appointment time modification for the series  won t propagate to the one modified occurrence     Critical changes include modifications to     e Appointment times    Recurrence patterns    Ranges of occurrences    If your users make critical changes to their recurring series  individually modified occurrences lose  their modifications     Start dates for recurring Salesforce doesn   t support modifications to start dates that already occurred   series in Outlook    End dates for recurring Those modifications won t propagate to Outlook  Users can  however  modify end dates in  series in Salesforce Outlook  but that type of critical change will clear all modifications your users made to individual  occurrences   in both Outlook and Salesforce     Individual occurrences Users may lose those changes if they make critical changes to the recurring series     Recurring series to Salesforce doesn   t support these types of modifications   single events    and    Single events to  recur
249. re some things to keep in mind when searching by Global Ultimate D U N S Number     Global Ultimate D U N S Number search results o7 y include accounts that are in Data com  so you may not get complete  Global Ultimate D U N S results if some members of the corporate structure are not in Data com     You can use filters to narrow down your Global Ultimate D U N S Number search results     125    D amp B Companies D amp B Companies User Features and Enhancements      You can export records from your Global Ultimate D U N S Number search results     You can   t save the search     126    SITE COM    Page Breadcrumbs    Available for purchase in  Enterprise and Unlimited Editions    Available  with limitations  in  Developer Edition       In Winter    13  we added a new Breadcrumb page element that you can add to your Site com pages and page templates to help  users navigate through your site  Just like the Menu page element  a breadcrumb is based on the site map  You can customize  the breadcrumb by changing the root node  the separator between the nodes  and the visual style of the breadcrumb itself     For more information  see    Adding Breadcrumb Navigation to Pages    in the online help     Updated Menu Source Options    Available for purchase in  Enterprise and Unlimited Editions    Available  with limitations  in  Developer Edition       In Winter 13  we updated the Menu Source field on the Properties pane to give publishers and designers greater flexibility  when creati
250. reate    on accounts  To add contacts from Data com     Create    on contacts  To add Data com contacts from an account    Read    on accounts AND    Create    on contacts    To add Data com contacts as leads    Create    on leads       If errors are preventing you from adding one or more Data com records to Salesforce  we ll provide a  csv error log file  How  we provide the error log depends on what you were trying to do     109    Data com Clean Data com Clean Administrator Features and Enhancements      Ifyou were trying to add fewer than 200 records  you ll see a message with a link to the error log on the Files tab   If you were trying to add 200 records or more  you ll receive an email with a link to the error log on the Files tab   If you were trying to add any number of records and you do not have Chatter enabled  you ll receive an email with the error  log attached     1  Open the record addition error log and review the errors  then take one of these actions       Ifyou see errors regarding duplicate records  you don   t need to do anything     Duplicate    errors mean that the records  are already in Salesforce  so you don   t need to add them again  If your Data com preferences are set to allow duplicates   the error log will not include any    duplicate    errors      Ifyou see errors regarding your organization   s custom configurations  such as triggers  validation rules  or workflow   let your system administrator know because they may need to correct these c
251. reated after June 14  2012    To create and edit configurations     Customize Application          Agent configurations control how Live Agent appears and functions for agents using it in the Live Agent console or the Service  Cloud console  With the Auto Away on Decline option  you can decide whether agents    status should automatically be  changed to Away when they decline incoming chat requests     1  Click Your Name  gt  Setup  gt  Customize  gt  Live Agent  gt  Agent Configuration   2  Click New  or click Edit next to the name of an existing configuration     76    Service Cloud Console Custom Hotkeys for the Service Cloud Console    3  Select Auto Away on Decline to automatically change agents    status to Away when they decline chat requests  Note   this option applies only when agents are assigned to chat buttons that use push routing   4  Click Save     For more information about agent configurations  see    Agent Configuration Overview    in the online help     SERVICE CLOUD CONSOLE    Custom Hotkeys for the Service Cloud Console    Available in  Enterprise  Unlimited  and Developer Editions with the Service Cloud    The Service Cloud console is designed for users in fast paced environments who need to find  update  and create records  quickly  With Winter    13  administrators can create and customize keyboard shortcuts for each of their organization   s Service  Cloud console apps  Keyboard shortcuts let users perform actions by pressing a combination of keys ins
252. reenField     Flow  an existing fieldon f ee  FlowScreenField     MobileSettings All    Changed    New    Dene true    You can set either allowBack or  allowFinish to false  but not both     Now supports merge fields     Supports the new multi select checkboxes and  multi select picklist screen fields     Must be set to String to support the new  multi select checkboxes and multi select  picklist screen fields     Also supports the new checkbox input screen  field  which is specified by this combination  of settings       dataType   Boolean     fieldType   InputField    Supports the selection of one FlowChoice  element to use as the default value for a    multi select checkboxes field or a multi select  picklist field     Now has the following new valid values     MultiSelectCheckboxes          MultiSelectPicklist    At runtime  each multi select field stores its  field value as a concatenation of the  user selected choice values  separated by  semicolons  Any semicolons in the selected  choice values are removed when added to the  multi select field value     Also supports the new checkbox input screen  field  which is specified by this combination  of settings     e  dataType   Boolean       fieldType   InputField    New settings file located in the orgSettings  directory of the corresponding package  directory  Represents an organization   s mobile    167    Developer Console Enhancements API Enhancements          settings  such as mobile Chatter settings   whether Mobile 
253. ring series    The order of occurrences Outlook doesn   t support this type of occurrence  For example  your user set up a daily recurring  series  Later  your user wants to change the October 10th occurrence to occur on October 8th   therefore creating two occurrences on October 8th  Outlook doesn   t support this     Individual occurrences in Outlook modifications propagate to occurrences in Salesforce  regardless of whether the ones in  Outlook Salesforce include critical modifications     Deleted occurrences in Salesforce  however  remain deleted  and aren   t replaced with individually  modified occurrences from Outlook        53    Salesforce for Outlook Enhancements Saving Time with Email Associations    Saving Time with Email Associations    You asked for it  This enhancement is from an idea on the IdeaExchange        We listened to what your users wanted  so we reinstated the way Salesforce handled unresolved email associations on the My  Unresolved Items page  Starting in Spring 12  we displayed separate rows for each unresolved email address in the To and  Cc fields of emails your users added to Salesforce  With these separate rows  Spring    12 and Summer    12 increased the time  required for maintaining the My Unresolved Items page     With Winter    13  the My Unresolved Items page now displays only one row for each email when Salesforce can   t match any  email addresses for recipients that appear in the To and Cc fields of emails your users add to Salesforce 
254. rs     203    Developer Console Enhancements Push Major Upgrade    Starting with Winter    13  ISVs can push a new major version of your package directly to any subscriber  Previously  push  upgrades were supported only for patches  that is  upgrades that did not add any new components  Winter    13 removes that  restriction  enabling you to also push major upgrades involving significant new functionality     f  Warning     When you push an upgrade  you   re making changes to a subscriber   s organization without their explicit consent   Hence  it   s important to plan ahead and exercise due caution     About Push Upgrades    You can push either a patch or a major upgrade  A patch only contains bug fixes and minor enhancements  In contrast  a major  upgrade can include major enhancements and new features that add new components  At a high level  pushing an upgrade  involves the following steps     Pushing a major upgrade entails a higher degree of risk as it can break existing functionality in a subscriber   s organization   This is because new components in the upgraded package might not be available to existing users of the package  or could  overwrite users    customizations  As the app developer  it   s your responsibility to protect users from any adverse impact due to  upgrading  We strongly recommend you consider all potential consequences of the upgrade and take appropriate steps to  prevent any problems     When pushing a major upgrade  we recommend that you divide c
255. rtal Enhancements        November 21  Known Issue Involving API and The API version 25 0 or earlier doesn   t return events with multiple  2012 Email Integration Compatibility contacts related to the events     If you use Connect for Outlook or Connect for Lotus Notes  you ll  lose event data when you relate multiple contacts to an event that  you update in Salesforce and sync these events from Salesforce to  your email system     November 21  Expanded Definition of Datacom The Data ccom Inactive status now includes records that have  2012 Inactive Status been classified as non marketable by D amp B    November 21  Expanded International Data from Data com has more international records available  giving you more  2012 D amp B account and contact search results     November 21  Chatter REST API Enhancements The Bookmarks Resources topic contained an incorrect example  2012 of the Feed Items resource  The correct example is    chatter feed items 0DSD0000000Lr6zKAC  i sBookmarkedByCurrentUser trnue     November 14  Chatter REST API Enhancements The File Input request body incorrectly listed the description  2012 parameter  The correct name of the parameter is desc     November 14  Chatter REST API Enhancements The Group Member response body incorrectly stated that the value    2012 of the id property was a user ID  The correct value of the id  property is a group membership ID   November 7  2012 Salesforce Touch A downloadable version of Salesforce Touch that can be installed  
256. rth and East are positive values  South and West are negative values     5  Follow the steps to complete the wizard     ORGANIZATION WIDE PERMISSION SETS    Organization Wide Permission Sets Overview    Available in  Enterprise  Unlimited  and Developer Editions    To create and assign permission sets     Manage Users          In Winter    13  you can create organization wide permission sets  which aren   t associated with a specific user license  In the  past  if you wanted to assign one set of permissions and settings to users with different user licenses  you would create several  permission sets   one for each type of user license  Now with organization wide permission sets  you can create a single  permission set and assign it to users with different user licenses     For example  let   s say you d like to grant the    API Enabled    permission to several users in your organization   some have the  Salesforce user license and others have the Salesforce Platform user license  You can now create a single organization wide  permission set with no associated user license and assign it to both types of users     Creating an Organization Wide Permission Set    Before creating a permission set  consider who you ll assign it to  If you plan to assign the permission set to users with only  one type of user license  it   s still a best practice to associate that user license with the permission set  But if you plan to assign  the permission set to users with different licenses  cr
257. s     The Portal publisher shows two options when agents are working on cases that are associated with questions     1  Customer Only   Selecting this option posts a private reply to the customer who asked the question  Optionally  agents  can select Send Email to send a message to the customer letting them know that a reply to their question has been posted           2  Everyone   Selecting this option posts a public reply that   s visible to anyone in the Chatter Answers community where  the question was posted        Portal v    Write an answer          Send Email             64    Case Feed Enhancements Smart Email Templates in Case Feed       Portal v    Write an answer              For more information on using the Portal publisher to reply to customers  see    Communicating with Customers via the  Customer Portal and Chatter Answers    in the online help     Smart Email Templates in Case Feed    Available in  Enterprise  Unlimited  and Developer Editions    Default email templates make it easy for support agents to respond to customers more quickly  more accurately  and with  greater consistency  The email templates are preloaded  so agents don   t need to browse for the templates they need before  writing email  You can create as many templates as needed and assign them based on your company   s needs  For example  if  your support center handles issues related to multiple products  you can create a specific template for each product and preload  the appropriate templ
258. s   For example  if you own two opportunities  each worth  10 000  the Owner Only Amount  is  20 000      Amount Without Adjustments   The sum of all of a person   s owned opportunities and  also his or her   s subordinates    opportunities  without adjustments  Subordinates include  everyone reporting up to a person in the forecast hierarchy  For example  if the sum of the  amount of all opportunities owned by you is  20 000 and the sum of the amount of your  subordinates    opportunities is  55 000  the Amount Without Adjustments is  75 000      Amount Without Manager Adjustments   The forecast number as seen by the forecast  owner  This is the sum of the owner   s opportunities and his or her subordinates    opportunities   including adjustments made on the subordinates    forecasts  It doesn   t include adjustments  made by forecast managers above the owner in the forecast hierarchy  For example  say Anne has  an Amount Without Adjustments of  75 000  made up of  20 000 of her own opportunities  and  55 000 of opportunities owned by her subordinate Ben  Additionally  she adjusted  Ben   s amount to  65 000 for a total of  85 000  If you adjust Anne   s number from  85 000  to  100 000  then you see  85 000 in Amount Without Manager Adjustments because  this is what Anne sees  and Anne can   t see your adjustments as you re her manager   To see  the amount that includes your adjustment to  100 000  look at Forecast Amount      Forecast Amount   The forecast from the foreca
259. s and Sharing Enhancements    Organization Wide Permission Sets    User Sharing   Pilot  available within 24  hours after the Winter    13 release        Visual Workflow Enhancements       Search Controls in the Cloud Flow x   Designer    17    Force com Enhancements    Zoom Controls in the Cloud Flow  Designer    lsi       K    New Types of Flow Screen Fields       Visualforce Controller Access to Subflow  Variables    K       K    Flow Navigation Options       Resources for Getting Started with the  Cloud Flow Designer    Additional Cloud Flow Designer  Usability Enhancements    Merge Fields in Help Text and User  Input Validation Messages    K       K    K    Desktop Flow Designer No Longer    K    Supports New API Versions       K    Desktop Flow Designer Links and    Documentation       Schema Builder Enhancements    Deleting Custom Objects with Schema  Builder       Deleting Custom Fields with Schema  Builder    More Custom Object Properties in  Schema Builder       18    Force com Enhancements    Security Enhancements    Auth Providers Detect and Link to  Existing Users    K       Updated OAuth 2 0 Bearer Assertion  Request    OAuth 2 0 JWT Bearer Token Flow    K       i  i       New Auth Provider Parameters    K       K    Login Policy for My Domains Now  Explicitly Configured             Clickjacking Protection Available    K       K    Service Provider Initiated Request  Binding       New getAccessTokenMap Method    K       K    Connected Applications   Pilot    Thi
260. s and click Continue     3  Note  If one or more records can   t be added to Salesforce because of errors  we ll notify you and provide a  csv file    with the error details          4  Click Go to Leads to view the list of new records on the Leads home page     Understanding Lead Conversion    Available in  Group  Professional  Enterprise  Unlimited  and Developer Editions       When you convert a lead  Salesforce creates a new account  contact  and  optionally  an opportunity using the information  from the lead  Any campaign members are moved to the new contact and the lead becomes read only  If an existing account  and contact have the same names as those specified on the lead  you can choose to update the existing account and contact   Information from the lead is inserted only into blank fields  Salesforce does not overwrite existing account and contact data     All open and closed activities from the lead are attached to the account  contact  and opportunity  You can assign the owner  of the records  and schedule a follow up task  When you assign a new owner  only the open activities are assigned to the new  owner  If you have custom lead fields  that information can be inserted into custom account  contact  or opportunity fields   Converted leads can t be viewed  although they appear in lead reports  Salesforce updates the Last Modified Date and  Last Modified By system fields on converted leads when picklist values included on converted leads are changed     Consider
261. s feature is visible to all users in new  Development Edition organizations  To  enable this feature in existing  Development Edition organizations or  other organizations  contact  salesforce com        Developer Console Enhancements       Tests Tool    19    Force com Enhancements    Query Editor    Perspectives in a System Log View    Command Line Window  Navigating through Views  Viewing Keyboard Shortcuts    Resuming Updates to the Developer  Console       Force com IDE Enhancements    Force com IDE Enhancements       API Enhancements       API Enhancements x    SOQL Polymorphism   Developer x   Preview   Geolocation Custom Field SOQL x     Queries   Beta    20    Force com Enhancements    ISOSL Enhancements       Connected Applications   Pilot    This feature is visible to all users in new  Development Edition organizations  To  enable this feature in existing  Development Edition organizations or  other organizations  contact  salesforce com        Force com Canvas   Pilot  available  within 24 hours after the Winter 713  release     This feature is visible to all users in new  Development Edition organizations  To  enable this feature in existing  Development Edition organizations or  other organizations  contact  salesforce com        Apex Code Enhancements                   Non Primitive Types in Map Keys and   Sets   Support for Testing Callouts   Chatter API   Connect in Apex  Pilot   New ID  getSObjectType Method   New String Methods    21    Force com Enhancemen
262. s page  check the Data com Licenses section  You ll    see either    Corporate    or    Premium        Implementation Guidelines      Make sure you add the D amp B Companies tab to user profiles      Ifyou use the Data com Clean product and want to automatically update D amp B Company records  define that preference      The D amp B fields that also exist on the account object  such as D U N S Number  SIC Code  and NAICS Code  are  managed fields  and they are updated by both manual and automated clean processes  Automated clean jobs are available  if you use the Data com Clean product      Because the D amp B Company object is read only  except for Data com Clean updates   you can   t create task and field update  workflow rules for it  Rules that are triggered by D amp B field changes that act on other objects are permitted  however  For  example  you can create a workflow rule that updates a custom field on an account record when a D amp B Company record  is created      You can enable users to view and delete D amp B Company records by assigning the appropriate profile permissions  Standard  profiles automatically have the Read D amp B Company records permission  but need to be assigned the Delete D amp B  Company records permission  Custom profiles need to be assigned both permissions     118    D amp B Companies D amp B Companies Administrator Features and Enhancements    Defining Your Data com Clean Job Preferences  Data com Clean Only     Data com available in  Contac
263. s that use a large number of organizations for  development and testing     From the Environment Hub  you can       Register all organizations currently used by your company     Automatically detect relationships between organizations     View details about each organization  such as its type  for example  Development  Patch  or Release  and tags    Assign one or more tags to any organization    e Filter organizations by tag    Setting Up the Environment Hub  You only need to set up the Environment Hub once     1  Click Name  gt  Setup  gt  Company Profile  gt  Environment Hub   2  Click Create Hub     Your current organization is now the Environment Hub  From the Hub  you can perform these actions       Click Add Organization to add another organization     Click the name of any organization to view details about it  including any child organizations it has     Click Edit next to an organization to update its details     209    Additional Force com Enhancements Workflow Evaluation Criteria Usability Enhancements      Click Remove next to an organization to remove it from the Hub     Click Filter and then click the name of a tag to view a list of all organizations with that tag     Click Remove Hub to remove the Hub     Adding Organizations to the Environment Hub    To add an organization     Click Name  gt  Setup  gt  Company Profile  gt  Environment Hub    Click Add Organization    Enter your username and password for the organization    Optionally  select Auto Detect Relat
264. s the extension of the file       37    Additional Chatter Enhancements Chatter REST API Enhancements     isInMyFileSync    Reserved for future use  0 mimeType   Specifies the MIME type of the file    In addition  the Feed Item Attachment  Content response body now includes renditionUr1  a URL to the rendition  resource for the file      The Flat Feed and Flat Feed Item response bodies are no longer available      The Group Page does not include a total property as previously listed in the documentation      A name property has been added to both the Organization and Organization Summary response bodies    e An id property has been added to the Record Summary response body      The User Group Page response body was missing from the documentation  It is returned by the User Groups resource      The isChatterGuest property on the User Detail and User Summary response bodies is no longer available as of version  26 0  Use the new userType property in the response body instead      An isActive property has been added to the User Summary response body      The User Settings response body has the following new properties     0 hasAccessToInternalOrg   User is a member of an internal organization      hasFileSync   Reserved for future use       The Features response body includes chat terTopics  which is reserved for the Chatter topics pilot     Prior to version 26 0  the following responses were rendered differently in JSON than in XML  The XML response did  not include some Boolea
265. s with Read Write  access can edit the record  excluding fields such as role  profile  or permissions     Portal users can   t edit user records        User Sharing includes these new features       Organization wide defaults for user records    User sharing rules based on membership to a public group  role  or territory    Manual sharing on individual user records         View All Users    permission    These features are introduced in the following sections     135    User Sharing   Pilot User Sharing Overview    Setting the Organization Wide Defaults for User Records    To set default sharing access     Manage Users          a  Note  When User Sharing is first turned on  the default access setting is Public Read Only for internal users  and    Private for external users  If the default access is Private for external users such as high volume portal users and guest  k users  they don   t have Read access to internal users  Internal users maintain Read Write access to their own records   You can open up access using sharing rules  manual sharing  or user permissions     Let   s say that your organization has internal users  employees and sales agents  and external users  customers portal users   under different agents or portal accounts  with these requirements       Employees can see everyone     Sales agents can see employees  other selected agents  and their own customer user records only     Customers can see other customers only if they are under the same agent or porta
266. sayHello String helloTo     return  Hello     helloTo     from the Grandparent                  This Visualforce page simply calls the sayHe1l1lo remote action      lt apex page controller  ChildRemoteController   gt    lt script type  text javascript  gt   function sayHello helloTo     ChildRemoteController sayHello helloTo  function result  event     if event status     document getElementById  result    innerHTML   result      J         LASCI     lt button onclick  sayHello  Jude     gt Say Hello lt  button gt  lt br  gt    lt div id  result  gt  Results   lt  div gt      lt  apex page gt     The remote method doesn   t exist in the ChildRemoteController class  Instead  it   s inherited from  GrandparentRemoteController     Pass Through HTML Attributes    You can add arbitrary attributes to the  lt apex  output Panel gt  component that will be    passed through    to the rendered  HTML  This is useful  for example  when using Visualforce with JavaScript frameworks  such as jQuery Mobile and  Knockout js  that use data    attributes as hooks to activate framework functions     To add a pass through attribute to  lt apex  output Panel gt   prefix the attribute with    html     and set the attribute value as  normal         lt apex page showHeader  false  standardStylesheets  false  doctype  htm1 5 0  gt         lt apex outputPanel layout  block  html data role  panel  html data id  menu  gt    lt apex insert name  menu   gt    lt  apex outputPanel gt      lt apex outputPanel
267. secwessevaesavoaencvecusoavvaysaincdeavs  vaesdenedesbacbadvaeveda sdnghasesbeteeteedasaes 139  Schema Builder Enhancement          cccscsssesssssesseecscesceseesssccsecscescaeeecseesecseaesasecceecseeaeeassaseceaecaeeaeeaeseceesaecaeeaesaeeeseeeaseaeeaseateees 145    Table of Contents   Decu GE MAM CCUG INS eves cea eaccey aan ste sh veusaae E A se vtacest tes stneseuesiossusis Siesataes cts E 146  Developer Console Enhanicenents      cscssszsdesteestesvescosesactonosessvestesdeonvssbevtonetentveneetoegto seis stvtetonsesuaieasendvebestetetedesentesbsysdseseogoeets 148  Force com IDE Mihaniceni ents   ccctsick oieee iesieta iiie iE O NEEE N E N Eie 157  Connected Applications   Pilot  mssrarisceiianiin niniin a EA R AERAN E OE 158  Borce  Com  Canvas     Pilotaren aree a na a E E E ENEE e ai ieas 158  API Enhancements sssr e a u etn iare EE Ea oR ae ees ci ere oe Ree 159  Apex Code  Enhancements  snsnsuisirariiriisiriiii in aE EEE RETARO NA 169  Visualforce Charting    Generally Availables nierstenen asar a e e iE e E E KEKEE NE E 191  Additional Visualforce Enhancements     ccccicdtesiiedetartnieeescies te eens eoe ENE e EE EEE EEEE ENESE E S 195  Push  Major Uporadesssccccisc ccictves caress assess iN E AE N EEA A E AN Eai 203  Environment Hub Pilotun renine EEEE EEE AEE S OE EEEE E 209  Additional Force com Enhancements         ssssssssssssssecsesssssssssesescseseneeeecsescscscuceceesscaesesesavacscacuceeesecasecsesaeacaeaeueneeeseeesseeeseeeeas 210  Help and Training Enh
268. sforce features to include  Applying your company   s branding so that the community is recognizable  Enabling your employees  customers  and partners to collaborate on Chatter and business processes  records   Creating public facing and authenticated pages for your communities    Enabling login options based on SAML for single sign on for people outside your company    w   Note  Salesforce Knowledge article URLs within communities have changed  Reset any community article links or  bookmarks you saved before Winter  13     Browser Enhancements    Salesforce now supports Microsoft   Internet Explorer   10  except for the Service Cloud console  Additional browser support  updates include     Google Chrome Frame    plug in for Microsoft   Internet Explorer   7 is now supported   Apple   Safari   version 5 1 x is supported on Mac OS X     As of Summer    12  we discontinued support for Internet Explorer   6  Existing features that have previously worked in this  browser may continue to work through 2014  If you use Internet Explorer     we recommend using the latest version  See     Supported Browsers    in the online help for details on browser support     25    CHATTER    Polls       Available in  Group  Professional  Enterprise  Unlimited  Contact Manager  and Developer Editions    4    ow You asked for it  This enhancement is from an idea on the IdeaExchange     Starting in Winter    13  you can create a poll in your feed  Polls are a great way to get people   s opinions or 
269. shtag topic usage data  choose the Hashtag Definitions primary object and  select from the following fields       Created Date   Date the hashtag topic was created    Hashtag Text   Text following the hashtag          Normalized Hashtag Text   Text following the hashtag      without capitalization and punctuation  Hashtag Count   Number of times the hashtag is used    Improved Feed Sorting Includes Polls    You can now sort your feed by most recent activity or post date  Sorting by most recent activity shows the posts with the most  recent comments at the top of your feed  including polls with new comments  Sorting by post date shows the latest posts at  the top  regardless of whether they have new comments  For new users  the feed is sorted by most recent activity  by default   You can toggle the feed sorting at any time by clicking Post Date or Most Recent Activity above your feed     Post Visibility    Available in  Group  Professional  Enterprise  Unlimited  Contact Manager  and Developer Editions       We ve added a visibility widget to help you determine who can see the posts and where your posts can be found in Chatter     The widget is available for each post type  Post  File  Link  or Poll   Select your post type and click Q below the text box to  open the visibility widget     Updated Chatter Icons and Buttons    We ve changed the appearance of the Chatter icons and buttons to improve the overall navigation and cohesion throughout  the app  For example  the color of
270. ssion sets with no user license   enter User  s License for the Setting  set the Operator to equals  and enter    in the Value field     4  Under Select Columns to Display  add User License to the settings that you want to appear as columns in the list view     5  Click Save  or if you re cloning an existing view  rename it  and click Save As     This permission sets list view includes a User License column  The Recruiter App permission set has no associated user license   so its User License entry is blank                    Permission Sets ipine     Org Permission Sets v Edit   Delete   Create New View     New   t  A B c D E F G H I JI K L M N o P a R s T u v w  x Y  Z   Other AN    E Action Permission Set Label  t User License      Del  Clone Accounts   Custom Fields Salesforce    E  Del  Clone Additional Customer Portal Access Customer Portal User   E  Del  Clone Call Center   Additional Access Service Cloud   E  Del  Clone Recruiter App   E  Del  Clone Sales Manager Permissions Salesforce                   133    Organization Wide Permission Sets Organization Wide Permission Sets Overview    Assigning Permission Sets    When you assign a permission set with no associated user license  all of its enabled settings and permissions must be allowed  by the user   s license  or the assignment will fail  For example  if you create an organization wide permission set and enable     Read    on opportunities  you can   t assign that permission set to users with the Salesforce Plat
271. st in  Unlimited Edition    Data com Clean available in  Developer  Enterprise  and Professional Editions    Data com Clean available for an additional cost in  Unlimited Edition       To implement Data com     Customize Application       In Data com search results and export files  you can mask out or remove email and phone values for contact and lead records  already in Salesforce that have Do Not CallorEmail Opt Out selected        For example  You have a lead record in Salesforce for Sally Larkin and on that record the Do Not Call checkbox is selected   You search for Sally Larkin as a contact on the Data com tab and her record appears in the search results list  marked as already  in Salesforce      The Phone field is masked in the search results list  and also on Sally   s contact card  If you export the record   its Phone field is blank in the   csv file     1  Click Your Name  gt  Setup  gt  Data com Administration  gt  Preferences    2  Select the Respect Do Not Contact Settings checkbox   For records that have Do Not CallorEmail Opt Out selected  Phone or Email field values are masked in the search  results and on the Contact Card  and blank in   csv files created when you export records           Allowing Duplicate Data com Records in Salesforce    Data com available in  Contact Manager  Developer  Enterprise  Group  and Professional Editions    Data com available for an additional cost in  Unlimited Edition    Data com Clean available in  Developer  Enterprise  an
272. st manager   s perspective and the sum of  the owner   s and subordinates    opportunities  including all forecast adjustments  For example   say you re a forecast manager and have another forecast manager reporting to you who has    40    Forecasts Enhancements Forecast Managers Can Adjust Forecasts in Any Currency    an Amount Without Manager Adjustment totaling  85 000  If you adjust the forecast to   100 000  the Forecast Amount is  100 000    Has Adjustment   A checkbox that indicates if an adjustment   s been made on a forecast  owner   s Amount Without Adjustments  For example  if you make an adjustment to one  of your subordinate   s forecast amounts  this box is checked  If your subordinate makes an  adjustment to one of his or her subordinate   s amounts  this box is also checked  However   unless you have the    View All Data    permission  if your forecast manager makes an adjustment to    your forecast amount  this box remains unchecked  you don   t have access to your forecast manager s  adjustment information     Forecasting Itemswith Viewing opportunity information for specific forecasting line items  For example  you might   Opportunities asa want to create a summary report for each of your subordinates that includes the opportunity   related object names and last activity dates for their forecasting items  alongside adjustment information and  final forecast amounts     Forecasting Quotas Viewing data about individual or team quotas  As a best practice  incl
273. strators can   t rename tabs and labels for an opportunity team member  When you select Your Name  gt  Setup  gt   Customize  gt  Tab Names and Labels  gt  Rename Tabs and Labels  opportunity team member isn   t included in the list of  tabs and labels       Triggers and validation rules aren   t supported when a user adds the default opportunity team on an opportunity     Enabling Team Selling    Enabling team selling gives your users access to create and use opportunity teams on opportunities     Available in  Enterprise  Unlimited  and Developer Editions       To enable team selling     Customize Application       Click Your Name  gt  Setup  gt  Customize  gt  Opportunities  gt  Opportunity Teams   Click Settings   Select Enable Team Selling and click Save        Select the opportunity page layouts that will display the new Opportunity Team related list   Optionally  select Append to users    personal related list customization     Click Save     So Roe    When team selling is enabled  you can add custom fields  custom buttons and links  validation rules  and Apex triggers to  opportunity teams  You can also edit opportunity team page layouts and create custom report types for opportunity teams     Disabling Team Selling    Available in  Enterprise  Unlimited  and Developer Editions       To disable team selling     Customize Application       1  Delete any custom fields  custom buttons and links  page layouts  validation rules  or Apex triggers that you have added  to opp
274. t Manager  Developer  Enterprise  Group  and Professional Editions  Data com available for an additional cost in  Unlimited Edition    Data com Clean available in  Developer  Enterprise  and Professional Editions    Data com Clean available for an additional cost in  Unlimited Edition       To define Data com Clean Preferences     Customize Application       Clean preferences let you specify       Which objects    records to clean with automated jobs    How you want to clean them    Jobs can either       Flag all fields in a Salesforce record whose values are different from those in the matched Data com record  or    Flag fields with different values and a so auto fill blank fields  You can set flag only or flag and auto fill preferences for entire records or field by field  If you use Data com Premium  you    can also clean D amp B Company records that are linked to accounts and leads  D amp B Company clean jobs automatically fill or  overwrite field values on D amp B company records  but do not change data on linked account or lead records     Your preferences take effect when the next scheduled clean job runs  and users will see the flags  as appropriate  when they  clean records manually        Note  Converted leads are excluded from Leads clean jobs     1  Click Your Name  gt  Setup  gt  Data comAdministration  gt  Clean  gt  Preferences   2  Select the Enable Clean jobs checkbox for each object whose records you want to clean   If you clear the Enable Clean  jobs checkb
275. t lines are the field values  To learn more about static resources  see    Defining Static Resources    in the  Salesforce online help     Once you create a static resource for your  csv file  the static resource will be assigned a MIME type  Supported MIME types  are       text csv  e application vnd ms excel    application octet stream    e text plain    181    Developer Console Enhancements Apex Code Enhancements       Test loadData Example    The following are steps for creating a sample  csv file and a static resource  and calling Test   loadData to insert the test  records     1  Create a  csv file that has the data for the test records  This is a sample  csv file with three account records  You can use  this sample content to create your  csv file     Name  Website  Phone  BillingStreet  BillingCity  BillingState  BillingPostalCode  BillingCountry  sForceTest1 http   www sforcetestl com   415  901 7000 The Landmark   One Market  San  Francisco  CA  94105 US  sForceTest2 http   www sforcetest2 com   415  901 7000 The Landmark   One Market Suit  300 San Francisco  CAT 94105 US   sForceTest3 http   www sforcetest3 com   415  901 7000 1 Market St San Francisco  CA  94105 US                2  Create a static resource for the  csv file     a  Click Your Name  gt  Setup  gt  Develop  gt  Static Resources  and then New Static Resource   b  Name your static resource testAccounts     c  Choose the file you just created   d  Click Save     3  Call Test  loadData ina test method t
276. t to use     The default external access must be more restrictive or equal to the default internal access     4  Click Save     You can   t deselect Grant Access Using Hierarchies for the user object  Users that are higher in the role or territory hierarchy  maintain Read access to their subordinates     cm    Note  Users inherit the same level of access to records that users below them in the role hierarchy have access to      _    These are common combinations for default internal and external access     Scenario 1 Private Private Users have Read access to those below them in the role hierarchy     External users don   t have Read access to internal users and vice  versa     Scenario 2 Public Read Only Private Internal users have Read access to all internal and external users   External users don   t have Read access to internal users        Internal users have Read Write access to their own records and Read access to their subordinates  regardless the defaults   External users include portal users and guest users  Portal users have Read access to other portal users if they are in the same  portal account  even if the default external access is Private     Creating User Sharing Rules    To create sharing rules     Manage Users          Create user sharing rules if you are extending access to user records  User sharing rules can be based on membership   public  groups  roles  or territories   or on other criteria  such as Department and Title  You can define up to 300 user s
277. tFeed  DashboardComponentFeed  DashboardFeed  EntitlementFeed  EventFeed   FeedItem   LeadFeed   NewsFeed  OpportunityFeed  Product2Feed  ReportFeed  ServiceContractFeed  SolutionFeed   TaskFeed   UserFeed  UserProfileFeed      T G O O O O O nG nO aG O O O nG nl OG G G      The ContentDocumentLink object now has the Visibility field  which is used for the Salesforce Communities  pilot program     The User object has the following new fields        UserPreferencesShowCityToExternalUsers       UserPreferencesShowCountryToExternalUsers       UserPreferencesShowEmailToExternalUsers       UserPreferencesShowFaxToExternalUsers       UserPreferencesShowManagerToExternalUsers          UserPreferencesShowMobilePhoneToExternalUsers       UserPreferencesShowPostalCodeToExternalUsers  UserPreferencesShowStateToExternalUsers    UserPreferencesShowStreetAddressToExternalUsers             UserPreferencesShowTitleToExternalUsers    c o gt   gt   gt  2 2S osooso o             UserPreferencesShowWorkPhoneToExternalUsers    Chatter API Objects  New Objects    These objects are new in API version 26 0       The HashtagDefinition object represents hashtag     topics in public Chatter posts and comments  Public posts and  comments include those on profiles and in public groups  but not those on records or in private groups     162    Developer Console Enhancements API Enhancements    Changed Objects  These objects have changed in API version 26 0       The ChatterActivity object now includes an In
278. tcciedicdact asset EE bes TATAEE NEEN E SEE TERSA L AEE 29  Work com  in Chatter   Pilot ense e E EE E EO E E EEE E REEE veces NEEE 30  Administrator Settings for Rich Media PreviewS           cssssssssssssssscsseseseseneeseeeecsesescscscesessnesesesecaeseseecscecensaeseseesatseseeseceeensaseees 31  Additional  Chatter Enhance menis ernia a ead deh a 32  Chatter REST  API Enhancements nonion niana ERER REET RAEE 35   BSNS E E aeeusnieacnes 39  Forecasts Enhancements sinees e e a aa teva hb aa Ea NEE ae i eta ENEE a eae ar Eara oeeo EEES 39  Opportunity Teams Enhancements  siiicar iiini aiis aeia E NEEESE EEE E ESE ai 43  Salesforce  for Outlook Ehanc   ments ssiccscevesisavicesscssessetiosicassaventiveioodsossonsaeesjudseds ovgenadeissidevacevouvesivavesousavvesvscheavadesdevsedsstounsons 47  Shared Activities  Enhancements  25  sce EREN RNA NENNE NAONA NEAN RNN N NON 55  Additional Sales Enhancemitii ssa A E ENA SE S 60   o E A T e AAPEEE A EE EA E EEA EEA PE ees 61  Case Feed Enhancemientsis ireira TEE N E EL AEE R NTR 61   Chatter AoW n a E RRR E a a RRN E E N N A 68    Table of Contents   DGS ves cece Secs tutus es POE EE A betas cuncscuiecuedhe cesanssteevauvaansundheuneedssissessbesb E E E E S 72   Live Agent Enhancements ssi  zccvsccsoideesdsalecesstestetacnstiedecbecbeesetheds darere ienesa era ae aea ESEN eet stneeseene redvtavlideleaalenhidian 76  Service   Cloud  Console E A ace A E A E E N E E E T E 77  Salesforce  Knowledges eiae e T OOTTE EA OE AOUE EOE E 81  Ad
279. tead of having to use  a mouse  Keyboard shortcuts can make working with a Service Cloud console more efficient  For example  instead of typing  case details and then using a mouse to click Save  you can create a keyboard shortcut so that users can type case details and    press CTRL S     Customizing Keyboard Shortcuts for a Service Cloud Console    Available in  Enterprise  Unlimited  and Developer Editions with the Service Cloud       To customize keyboard shortcuts for a Service Cloud console     Customize Application       Once you enable keyboard shortcuts for a console  several default shortcuts are available for customization  such as opening  and closing tabs  moving between tabs  and saving records  Before you can create custom shortcuts  a developer must define  the shortcut   s action with the addEventListener   method in the Service Cloud Console Integration Toolkit  You can   t  create keyboard shortcuts for actions performed outside of the console        To enable and customize keyboard shortcuts     Click Your Name  gt  Setup  gt  Create  gt  Apps   Click Edit next to a Service Cloud console app   Click Customize keyboard shortcuts    Click Edit on the top of the page    Select Enable keyboard shortcuts        Sd a de E    Edit an existing keyboard shortcut or create a new one     77    Service Cloud Console Custom Hotkeys for the Service Cloud Console      To edit a shortcut  click Edit next to the shortcut  type the combination of key commands to use  and cl
280. that a number of accounts will be assigned a new  more accurate value in the Industry  field  If your organization uses Data com Clean  records you have in Salesforce that have been given a new industry value will  have a Data com Clean status of Different  You can use Data com Clean to update these records with the new industry  values          Note  The subindustries under Goverment in the Data com Industry Categories classification system are currently  unavailable due to mapping limitations between the Data com Industry Categories and the SIC system     Industry Field on Account Card    The Industry field value on the account card is now the same Indust ry field value that   s on the account record  This makes  the account card more useful when you   re deciding whether you want to add an account to Salesforce     Data com Record Addition Error Logs    Data com now provides an easy way to see which records couldn t be added to Salesforce and why  The error log includes all  the information necessary to help you resolve the errors so you can get access to the records you need     Resolving Data com Record Addition Errors    Data com available in  Contact Manager  Developer  Enterprise  Group  and Professional Editions    Data com available for an additional cost in  Unlimited Edition    Data com Clean available in  Developer  Enterprise  and Professional Editions    Data com Clean available for an additional cost in  Unlimited Edition    To add accounts from Data com     C
281. the Questions  Tab       Enhancements to Questions and  Answers in the Feed    New Options to Customize Questions          Format Text and Add Photos to  Questions    API Access to Names and Photos from  the Feed    K       K       Option to Remove Sign In Links from  Chatter Answers    K       New Limits for Chatter Answers  Questions and Replies    K       Customer Portal Enhancements    New Behavior for Customer Portal  Email Notifications When No Change   Owner to Portal User Template   is Selected    Salesforce Communities  Pilot              Ideas Enhancements    Moderate Ideas Communities with the  Service Cloud Console    Idea Themes          Customize Idea Themes    Live Agent Enhancements       Auto Away Option in Live Agent  Configurations       Salesforce Knowledge Enhancements    12    Summary of Winter 13 Features and Impact on Salesforce Users    Minor Salesforce Knowledge  Enhancements       API Access Article Type       Mail Merge Template Available for  Articles       Sharing Rules for Knowledge       Share Articles with Public Links    Automatic Knowledge Filtering   Beta       Universal Knowledge  Sunlight  Search    Pilot    Service Cloud Console Enhancements    Custom Hotkeys for the Service Cloud  Console       Automatically Saved User Sessions for  the Service Cloud Console    Service Cloud Console Integration  Toolkit  Multiple Domains       Service Cloud Console Integration  Toolkit  Console Notifications       Analytics Enhancements             Prin
282. the canvas app  is running     The third party app that you want to expose as a canvas app can be written in any language  The only requirement is that the  app has a secure URL  HTTPS      For more information  see the Force com Canvas Developer s Guide     Force com Canvas Scenarios    From a high level view  there are two common scenarios where Force com Canvas is implemented       Application integration   You re a partner  systems integrator  or customer that builds cloud apps  and youd like to integrate  these applications with Salesforce       Application rationalization enterprise desktop   You re a large organization that has many existing apps that your users  access in addition to Salesforce  You d like to integrate these apps into Salesforce so that users can accomplish all of their  tasks in one place     API Enhancements    Available in  Enterprise  Unlimited  Developer  and Database com Editions    Winter    13  API version 26 0  improvements   Changes across the API layer     New and Changed Objects      Chatter API Objects        SOQL Enhancements     SOSL Enhancements    Changes to individual APIs     SOAP API Enhancements    159    Developer Console Enhancements API Enhancements    e Metadata API Enhancements    New and Changed Objects    For information about new and changed Chatter objects  see Chatter API Objects   New Objects    These objects are new in API version 26 0       The ChatterAnswersReputationLevel object represents a reputation level within 
283. the management of large flows     New Types of Flow Screen Fields      You asked for it  This enhancement is from an idea on the IdeaExchange     Available in  Enterprise  Unlimited  and Developer Editions    You can now add the following types of fields to flow screens  In the Cloud Flow Designer  these options appear on the Screen  overlay   s Add a Field tab       Checkbox input    Multi select choice     Multi select checkboxes     Multi select picklist    Checkbox Input Fields Overview    Available in  Enterprise  Unlimited  and Developer Editions    A checkbox screen field is of type boolean  Use a checkbox screen field to offer flow users a yes or no choice  For example     141    Visual Workflow Enhancements Visualforce Controller Access to Subflow Variables      Whether to opt into a marketing campaign     Whether to receive a follow up call after a purchase or case resolution     Whether an important policy is understood     In this case  you can validate that the user selects the checkbox before proceeding to the next screen     Multi Select Choice Fields Overview    Multi select checkboxes and multi select picklist fields enable flow users to select multiple choices in a screen field  At runtime   each multi select field stores its field value as a concatenation of the user selected choice values  separated by semicolons     Available in  Enterprise  Unlimited  and Developer Editions    When using multi select choice fields  consider the following       At runtime
284. the scatter chart type on your dashboard to display report information  Scatter charts show meaningful    information using one or two groups of report data plus summaries     Available in  Professional  Enterprise  Unlimited  and Developer Editions    You asked for it  This enhancement addresses an idea on the IdeaExchange     The scatter chart component type in dashboards has these limitations       It doesn t show tabular reports     You can t sort by labels or values     You can only change how Y axis units are displayed       You can manually define the range for Y axis alone     For more information  see    Scatter Chart Example    in the online help     89    Analytics More Support for the Enhanced Reports Tab    More Support for the Enhanced Reports Tab    Starting this release  the enhanced reports tab is available without enabling the user interface theme and is supported in  accessibility mode        The user interface theme setting  Enable New User Interface Theme  is located under Your Name  gt  Setup  gt  Customize   gt  User Interface     To learn more about the reports tab  see the tipsheet Using the Reports Tab     MOBILE    Salesforce Touch    Available in  Group  Professional  Enterprise  Unlimited  Contact Manager  and Developer Editions       Salesforce Touch   a version of Salesforce that   s designed specifically for touchscreen mobile devices   is now generally available     Using Salesforce Touch  you have real time access to the same information that
285. ting and Exporting Joined Reports  Joined Reports on Dashboards  Scatter Charts on Dashboards    13    Summary of Winter 13 Features and Impact on Salesforce Users    More Support for the Enhanced  Reports Tab       Mobile Enhancements    Salesforce Touch    Chatter for iPhone and iPad     Version  2 4 Generally Available       Data com New Features and Enhancements       Expanded international data gives you x   more accounts and contacts    Map Data com fields to Salesforce x   account  contact  and fields    Respect Do Not Contact settings in x   Data com search results and exports    Allow duplicate Data com account  x   contact  and lead records in Salesforce    Enjoy new Data com search filters  x   Employee  Revenue  and Location Type    14    Summary of Winter 13 Features and Impact on Salesforce Users    Get better identification of Data com  records you ve added  exported  or  cleaned       Exclude    green dot    records from exports       Preserve selected records across pages of  search results       Get more accurate mapping for the  Industry field    Find the more accurate Industry field  on the Account Card       Enjoy improved Data com record  addition error logs    Get improved reports from the Data com  Reports AppExchange package    Search Salesforce by D U N S Number           Data com Premium   Data com Clean  Product  Get clean jobs for D amp B  Company records linked to accounts and  leads       Get field level Clean settings for  accounts  contacts  a
286. ting features  a number of enhancements     New Chart Types    The existing Visualforce chart types  bar  line  and pie  are joined by four new chart types  area  gauge  radar  and scatter        Area Charts with  lt apex  areaSeries gt     Area charts are an alternative to vertical bar charts     191    Developer Console Enhancements Visualforce Charting   Generally Available    z  S     Es  3  Oo     gt  y     Month of the Year       Area charts are plotted on the same rectangular grid as the other linear data series charts  You can combine multiple   lt apex areaSeries gt   lt apex barSeries gt   lt apex lineSeries gt   and  lt apex scatterSeries gt  charts in the same  chart     See the Visualforce Developer s Guide for complete details of the area chart type     Gauge Charts with  lt apex  gaugeSeries gt     Use gauge charts to show progress along a specific metric  They plot a single value from their data series and place it along  the gauge axis  showing the total range of possible values        Like  lt apex pieSeries gt  pie charts  gauge charts use one data series  Unlike  lt apex pieSeries gt  charts  gauge charts use  only the first data value  To use  lt apex  gaugeSeries gt  charts  add an  lt apex axis type  Gauge  gt  component  which  sets the beginning and ending values for the gauge dial  Here   s a simple example      lt apex chart height  250  width  450  animate  true  legend  true  data    data   gt    lt apex axis type  Gauge  position  gauge  minimum 
287. tionHeader      34 http  setBody  card number     cnumber     amp card exp year   t texp_ yeart   car   36 if  Test isRunningTest         37 Http con   new Http      138 HttpResponse hs   con send http     40 system debug           hs getBody       41   42 response   hs getBody      43 statusCode hs getStatusCode      44 system debug  SS statusCode   ths getStatusCode       45  else     D  ae  ea     Problems              151    Developer Console Enhancements Query Editor    Query Editor    The Winter    13 release adds a Query Editor tool to the Developer Console  Use the Query Editor tool to query data from  your organization  For example  while developing Apex code  write a SOQL query and verify that the results are what you  expect  Edit and execute the query until you have the data you want  Then use the query in your code     Executing a SOQL Query  Use the Query Editor in the Developer Console to query data from your organization   1  In the Developer Console  click the Query Editor tab     2  Enter a SOQL query in the top pane of the Query Editor   3  Click Execute     If the query generates errors  the errors display in the bottom pane of the Query Editor     The data displays in a Query Results view   4  To rerun the query  click Refresh Grid     f  Warning  If you click Refresh Grid  data in a Query Results view that you   ve edited but haven   t saved is lost     Inserting Rows    You can create a record  insert a row  in the Object displayed in a Query Results vi
288. tions  such as approvals  workflow rules  or Apex  triggers  you use for accounts  contacts  or leads  Review and edit your customizations as needed so they will work with  the values supplied by your mappings      You can skip mapping individual Data com fields  but values for skipped fields won t be added  exported  or considered  when we calculate a record s clean status      Skipping or changing mappings for fields used to match Salesforce and Data com records may change some records    clean  status to Not Found    If you export Data com search results  the column headers in your Excel file will show the mapped field names  For example   if you map the Data com Phone field to the Contact object   s Mobile field  you ll see a header called    Mobile    for contacts   not    Phone         Ifyou map Data com fields that do not have values  some Salesforce records might revert to Not Found clean status   If you map a Data com field to a custom Salesforce field  the custom field   s label will appear on the Clean comparison    page     105    Data com Data com Administrator Features and Enhancements      Ifyou want to track changes to field mappings  you ll find them in the Setup Audit Trail  Click Your Name  gt  Security  Controls  gt  View Setup Audit Trail     Respecting Do Not Contact Settings in Data com Search Results and  Exports    Data com available in  Contact Manager  Developer  Enterprise  Group  and Professional Editions    Data com available for an additional co
289. toUrl  CreatorName  and CreatorSmallPhotoUrl fields have been  added       Inthe CaseComment object  the CreatorFullPhotoUrl  CreatorName  and CreatorSmallPhotoUrl fields  have been added       In the Question object  the CreatorFullPhotoUrl  CreatorName  and CreatorSmallPhotoUrl fields have  been added       Inthe Reply object  the CreatorFullPhotoUrl  CreatorName  and CreatorSmallPhotoUrl fields have been  added       The EmailMessage object is now updateable  as are the following fields     Bec Address  Cc Address  From Address  From Name  Headers   Html Body  Message Date  Subject  TextBody    ooo D a a a a a aG       ToAddress       In addition  Draft is now available as a value for the Status field  and the Repl yToEmailMessagelId field has  been added       Inthe User object  the UserPreferencesHideCSNDesktopTask and  UserPreferencesHideCSNGetChatterMobileTask fields have been added       Inthe LiveChatUserConfig object  the IsAutoAwayOnDecline field has been added     The NetworkId field  used for the Salesforce Communities pilot  has been added to the following objects        ChatterActivity      CollaborationGroup  0 EntitySubscription     HashtagDefinition      The NetworkScope and Visibility fields  used for the Salesforce Communities pilot  have been added to the  following objects     0 AccountFeed  0 AssetFeed     CampaignFeed    161    Developer Console Enhancements API Enhancements    CaseFeed  CollaborationGroupFeed  ContactFeed  ContentDocumentFeed  Contrac
290. tralia  India  Ireland  New Zealand  Singapore  South Africa  and the United Kingdom     107    Data com Data com User Enhancements    New Filters  Employee  Revenue  and Location Type    Data com offers several new filters you can use to narrow your account and contact search results        Use the Employee and Revenue filters to manually enter a range for the number of employees within an organization and  the organization   s annual revenue  respectively  Entering ranges is easy when you use abbreviations for multiples of thousands   K for thousand  M for million  and B for billion   For example  entering 10K automatically converts to 10 000     Use the Location Type filter to refine your results based on a whether an account  or an account associated with a contact   is a headquarters  single location  or branch     Better Identification of Data com Records Added  Exported  or Cleaned      You asked for it  This enhancement is from an idea on the IdeaExchange     In previous Salesforce releases  the green dot     next to records in your Data com search results represented only records you  added from Data com to Salesforce  With the Winter    13 release  the green dot now represents       Data com records you added     Data com records you exported     Records you manually added to Salesforce that have been matched with Data com Clean either manually or via automated  jobs     Exclude Green Dot Records from Export    When exporting account or contact records from Data com
291. ts    Loading Test Data from Static  Resources    Global Interface Method  Implementations No Longer Need to Be  Global          New Type  toString Method    K       K    String valueOf and System  debug  Use toString for Argument String  Conversion       SOQL Polymorphism Available in    Apex   Developer Preview    JSON Support for Additional Built In  Types    K    ik       Code Coverage Percentage Details    k       Creating sObjects with Default Values  Using the newSObject Method    E       Starting a Batch Job from Another Batch  Job    K       New getVariableValue Method    K       New Network Class and Method    K       New Messaging Method    K       New Access Token Method    K       K    Support  EmailTemplateSelector  Interface    i lt      Parameterized Interfaces No Longer       Supported    22    Force com Enhancements    Visualforce Enhancements    Visualforce Charting   Generally  Available       support caseFeed Component       NoSignIn Option for Chatter Answers  Communities       Enhancements to JavaScript Remoting       Pass Through HTML Attributes       Support for Internet Explorer  Conditional Comments       Inline Editing for Dependent Picklists       Map Attributes for Custom Components       Dynamic References to Lists and Maps  with  lt apex inputText gt     Improved Handling of Formula Fields  in  lt apex outputField gt           Changes to Escaping Behavior       Changes to Expression Evaluation with  Null Values       Restrictions and Validation
292. u select the Customize option for any object  you can select either Flag or Flag  amp  Auto Fill for individual  fields     5  Ifyou want to clean D amp B Company records  select the Enable Clean jobs for D amp B Companies checkbox        6  When you finish setting clean preferences for all the objects you want to clean  click Save     Preventing Data com Clean Auto Updates for Account  Contact  and Lead  Records    Data com available in  Contact Manager  Developer  Enterprise  Group  and Professional Editions  Data com available for an additional cost in  Unlimited Edition    Data com Clean available in  Developer  Enterprise  and Professional Editions    Data com Clean available for an additional cost in  Unlimited Edition    To implement Data com     Customize Application       To enable Data com users     Manage Users          To install AppExchange packages     Download AppExchange Packages       You can prevent individual account  contact  and lead records from having blank fields filled with Data com data when  automated Clean jobs are run  To do so  download and install the Data com Reports AppExchange package  It provides a  custom field you add to your page layouts to identify the records you don   t want auto updated  and a validation rule that  identifies attempted auto updates on fields within those records  The validation rule tells the clean job to skip those records      1  Important  If you use the Block Auto Update validation rule  keep this best practice in
293. ude all the default fields  in the report type  For example  you can include lookup fields  such the full name of the owner     When running the report  you can filter by your own name to see quotas you created and their  related accounts and owners        To make a forecasting report available to users  administrators must create a custom report type     1  Start creating a custom report type by clicking Your Name  gt  Setup  gt  Create  gt  Report Types and New Custom Report  Type     2  For Primary Object  select a Forecasting object  such as Forecasting Items or Forecasting Quotas   3  For Store in Category  select Forecasts     After deploying the report types  let your users know their locations and names     Forecast Managers Can Adjust Forecasts in Any Currency    To use Forecasts     Allow Forecasting       To adjust Forecasts     Override Forecasts             Note  This information applies to the Forecasts product beginning with the Winter    12 release and not to Customizable  Forecasts  You must enable Forecasts to create a forecasting custom report type     A    h    You asked for it  This enhancement is from the IdeaExchange  Amounts in the Forecast to use the same currency     41    Forecasts Enhancements Configurable Forecast List View for the Opportunity Pane    Now forecast managers can adjust direct subordinates    forecasts  no matter what forecast display currency the manager uses   Previously forecast managers had to set their display currencies to the 
294. uick Starts gadget that provides links to topics about a single area from  different sources on one page  Use them to get started with reports and dashboards  Salesforce for Outlook  Data com   and other important areas     215    
295. unity Teams   Using Opportunity Teams       Adding Members to an Opportunity  Team    Viewing Your Salesforce World in  Microsoft   Outlook      Beta    K        lt             K    Syncing Recurring Events       Saving Time with Email Associations       Shared Activities for Events    K       K    Known Issue Involving API and Email  Integration Compatibility    Enabling Shared Activities       K       Activity Rollup to Accounts for Contacts    K       Event and EventAttendee Object  Changes     lt       10    Summary of Winter 13 Features and Impact on Salesforce Users    Label Change for Upload New    Document Page       New Behavior for Partner Portal Email  Notifications When No Change Owner    to Portal User Template is  Selected    Salesforce Communities  Pilot        Service Enhancements    Case Feed Enhancements       New Customization Options in Case    Feed  Custom Publishers in Case Feed             New Feed Items Available in Case Feed       Email Drafts and Approvals       Support for Chatter Answers in Case  Feed       Smart Email Templates in Case Feed       Updated Look for Case Feed       New Case Feed Methods in the  Interaction API    Chatter Answers Enhancements       Encouraging Community Participation  with Chatter Answers Reputation    11    Summary of Winter 13 Features and Impact on Salesforce Users       Customizing Chatter Answers in Portals  using Visualforce Pages       Adding a Custom Visualforce Page to a  Portal       Creating Questions from 
296. ur profile     1  Above your feed  select Post  File  Link  or Poll   2  Type something about your post in the text box   3  Select My Followers or A Group from the drop down list below the text box     If you   re posting to a group  type part of the group   s name in the Search Groups field and select the group from the  drop down list     4  Click Share     Chatter Desktop Enhancements    Available in  Group  Professional  Enterprise  Unlimited  Contact Manager  and Developer Editions       The latest version of Chatter Desktop   a desktop app that increases your productivity by letting you collaborate in Chatter  outside of your Web browser   introduces Chatter Messenger for Desktop  With Chatter Messenger for Desktop  you can  chat with one or more people in your organization right from the Chatter Desktop app       You asked for it  This enhancement is from an idea on the IdeaExchange   Also in this version  you can     Like comments   View a list of people who like a post or comment    View files attached to comments    View dashboard snapshots      View shared messages  Starting after October 2012     e Attach files to comments     View your chat list sorted by first name  View the last activity date for your Chatter groups  View multiple chats more easily      Sort your chat favorites by people   s availability    28    Chatter Preview Links      See improved icons for your Chatter feed and dragging and dropping files to your posts    Several bugs have been fixed  in
297. urned the following errors        for  Database Error e   sr getErrors       System debug  e getMessage                New String Methods    Apex now has a richer library of String methods  Additional methods have been added for String manipulation and utility  operations  The new methods enable you to       Manipulate Strings  and make them longer or shorter     abbreviate  center  join  leftPad  remove    removeEnd       removestart  removeStartIgnoreCase  repeat   rightPad    0   0   0   0           removeEndIgnoreCase      0   0   0   0 splitByCharacterType             splitByCharacterTypeCamelCase      Change and check the case of String characters     0 capitalize    179       Developer Console Enhancements Apex Code Enhancements     isAllLowerCase     isAllUpperCase   swapCase   uncapitalize      Search and extract substrings     containsAny  containsIgnoreCase  containsNone  containsOnly  containsWhitespace  countMatches  deleteWhitespace  difference  endsWithIgnoreCase  getCommonPrefix  indexOfAny  indexOfAnyBut    indexOfIgnoreCase  lastIndexOf    lastIndexOfIgnoreCase       left   mid   right  startsWithIgnoreCase  substringAfter  substringAfterLast  substringBefore  substringBeforeLast                      0  0              0 indexOfDifference                    0  0   O             substringBetween      Escape and unescape Strings     escapeCsv  escapeEcmaScript    escapeHtm13       escapeHtm14    escapeXml       unescapeEcmaScript    unescapeHtml13       unescap
298. vernor limits of batch jobs  still apply  This change applies to batch Apex saved using Salesforce com API version 26 0 and later  Previously  with Apex  saved using Salesforce com API version 25 0 and earlier  you couldn   t call Database  executeBatch from within any batch  Apex method  The version used is the version of the running batch class that starts another batch job  If the finish method  in the running batch class calls a method in a helper class to start the batch job  the Salesforce com API version of the helper  class doesn   t matter     New getVariableValue Method    The new getVariableValue method in the Flow  Interview class enables a Visualforce controller to get the value of a  flow variable  The variable may be in the flow embedded in the Visualforce page  or in a separate flow that is called by a subflow  element  This method is used with Visual Workflow     getVariableValue String Object Returns the value of the specified flow variable  The flow variable  variableName can be in the flow embedded in the Visualforce page  or in a  separate flow that is called by a subflow element     The returned variable value comes from whichever flow the  interview is currently running  If the specified variable can   t be  found in that flow  the method returns null     The variableName argument specifies the unique name of the  flow variable     This method checks for the existence of the variable at run time  only  not at compile time        187    Developer Console
299. view this field        Option to Remove Sign In Links from Chatter Answers    Available in  Enterprise and Unlimited Editions    In Winter 13  you can use the NoSignIn Boolean attribute in the chatteranswers  allfeeds to remove all sign in  links from your community  Use this option when you have an external sign in path and want to ensure that your users follow  it instead of the standard Chatter Answers sign in  When the NoSignIn Boolean attribute is true  users can still search and  view publicly accessible content for the community  If they already have a valid session  they can still post questions  replies   vote  and flag content     IDEAS    Moderate Ideas Communities with the Service Cloud  Console    Available in  Professional  Enterprise  Unlimited  and Developer Editions    With Idea Moderation  moderators can facilitate healthy and respectful community discussions right from the agent console     72    Ideas Idea Themes      Moderators and administrators can review  update  create  and manage Ideas and the related Idea Themes from a tab  within the console       Moderators can now edit and delete ideas from the Ideas list view  making it even easier to manage an Ideas community   Click the Edit or Del link next to the idea you re working with     Switch views quickly and easily from the Ideas tab within the application  Click E Tab to display the Ideas tab  Click    List to toggle back to the list view     Idea Themes    Available in  Professional  Enterprise  Un
300. were added from Data com or not     Starting December 16  2011  all organizations purchasing Data com received the Data com Corporate product  Organizations  using previous versions have a limited set of fields     Data com Premium licenses can not be purchased for Salesforce organizations that already have Data com Corporate licenses     Data com Premium   Data com Premium is an upgrade to Data com Corporate  With Premium  you get all the features and D amp B fields available  to Corporate  plus over 70 additional D amp B fields for accounts you add to Salesforce from Data com  These fields are grouped  in a D amp B Company record that   s linked to the account  and accessible on the D amp B Companies tab     Data com Corporate licenses can not be purchased for Salesforce organizations that already have Data com Premium licenses     Data com Clean    Data com Clean is an important part of Salesforce   s Data com product suite  offering both manual and automated cleaning  for your account  contact  and lead records  To get automated cleaning  you must purchase Data com Clean for every Salesforce  user     With Data com Clean  users can manually clean Salesforce accounts  contacts  and leads  and you can configure jobs to flag  field value differences on Salesforce records or automatically fill blank fields     Data com Reports    Want to analyze the impact of Data com data on your business  Use the Data com Reports AppExchange package  It offers  several preconfigured Data co
301. wers Communities    In Winter    13  you can use the NoSignIn Boolean attribute of the  lt chatteranswers allfeeds gt  component to remove  sign in links from your community  Use this option when you have an external sign in path and want to ensure that your users  follow it instead of the standard Chatter Answers sign in  When NoSignIn is true  users can still search and view publicly  accessible content for the community  If they already have a valid session  they can still post questions  replies  vote  and flag    content     Enhancements to JavaScript Remoting    When a  RemoteAction method throws an exception due to a programming error or other failure  the Apex stack trace is  returned to the browser  Inspect the stack trace in a JavaScript debugger console or use it in the error handling of your response  callback function  Here   s a callback function that simply displays the stack trace when there   s an exception      lt script type  text javascript  gt   function getRemoteAccount      var accountName   document getElementBylId  acctSearch    value        Visualforce remoting Manager invokeAction       SRemoteAction MyController getAccount     accountName   function  result  event     if  event status     document  getElementById  acctId   innerHTML   result Id  document  getElementById  acctName   innerHTML   result Name     else if  event type      exception      document  getElementById  responseErrors    innerHTML    event message     lt br  gt  n lt pre gt    
302. with percentages  in addition to pixels     September 12  CRUC Notification for Changes to Added details about notification of a pending critical update for  Escaping Behavior in Visualforce this change in Visualforce       Browser Enhancements Added a note on discontinued support for Internet Explorer    6        New Access Token Method Added an entry for the new getAccessTokenMap method of the  Auth  AuthToken Apex class       Force com Canvas   Pilot The name of the Canvas Framework feature has changed to  Force com Canvas     3 Chatter API   Connect in Apex Changed the content from a note in the Chatter REST API section   Pilot  to its own topic  Also added the topic to the Apex Code    Enhancements section        Summary of Winter 13 Features and Impact on Salesforce Users    Summary of Winter    13 Features and Impact on Salesforce  Users    Winter    13 has features that immediately impact all users after the release  You may want to communicate these changes to    your users beforehand so they are prepared  Other features require direct action by an administrator before users can benefit  from the new functionality     These release notes describe the new and modified features available in this release  For visibility into known salesforce com  issues  please refer to the Known Issues Site     The following table summarizes the Winter    13 features and their impact on users  Review the feature details for the applicable  Salesforce editions     General Enhancements  
303. y  record linked to it  Salesforce will create one if it   s available in Data com and link the two records  You ll also see a D amp B  Company Record Linked field on the comparison page when you clean the account or lead     Note  If you clean your account records with the Data com Corporate or Premium product or Data com Clean   Data com converts non USD currencies to USD every month  which may cause the values in this field to change    k For organizations that use non USD currencies  we ignore the Annual Revenue field when determining a record   s  clean status  so the Clean Status field   s value does not change   We also remove the value from the Annual  Revenue field on account records and the clean comparison page     1  Check the record   s Clean Status field     If the status is Different or Not Compared  click Clean to open the comparison page and compare the Salesforce  record with Data com   s     a2 Tip  From the Clean Status field  you can also get additional status information  such as which fields have    different data in Data com  and then clean the record  Just click the status icon      and the popup will guide you     3  Compare the two records side by side  You ll see a check mark next to any Data com field value that matches the  corresponding value in your Salesforce record    4  Select the check box next to any Data com value you want to accept    5  Click Save when you re satisfied that the record is accurate  even if you don   t accept any data fro
304. ystem Log view in the Developer Console  You can switch perspectives to best suit    the task at hand     1  In the Developer Console  click the Logs Tab and double click a debug log to open it in a System Log view   2  Click Perspective  Perspective Name  gt  Perspective Manager     3  Select a perspective name and click Open  or double click the perspective     Deleting a Perspective in a System Log View    A perspective is a layout of panels in a System Log view in the Developer Console  You can delete perspectives you no longer  need     1  In the Developer Console  click the Logs Tab and double click a debug log to open it in a System Log view     2  Click Perspective  Perspective Name  gt  Perspective Manager   3  Select a perspective to delete and click Delete     154    Developer Console Enhancements Additional Enhancements to the Developer Console    Setting the Default Perspective in a System Log View    A perspective is a layout of panels in a System Log view in the Developer Console  When you open a log  it opens in the  default perspective  Set your most commonly used perspective as the default     1  In the Developer Console  click the Logs Tab and double click a debug log to open it in a System Log view   2  Click Perspective  Perspective Name  gt  Perspective Manager   3  Select a perspective name and click Set Default     Additional Enhancements to the Developer Console    In addition to the major features  the Winter    13 release includes the following mino
    
Download Pdf Manuals
 
 
    
Related Search
    
Related Contents
horseAlarm - Lantbutiken  SBS IP1039EU mobile phone case    GPC 183  Dissertação - Faculdade de Engenharia da Universidade do Porto  Guia do Usuário  User manual CST-20 CST-50  Manuale Installazione GAS 12  DM23  Samsung S23B550V Lietotāja rokasgrāmata    Copyright © All rights reserved. 
   Failed to retrieve file